Home
        NTP servers - r/v sikuliaq
         Contents
1.    
2.        00000000000000000000000 000000000 000000000000 165  Verifying Redundancy                                222 165  Restoring Redundant Ethernet Ports    165  Managing Users                                                     2 166  Changing the Password             00000000000000000 000000000000000 0a a0 001da aa a011 a araa 166  Enabling Password ReTcoveTY  166  Creating a New User    166  Deleting a Current User    167  Estimating Worst Case Time Error when GPS is Unavailable                        167  Setting the Time Manually  0 00000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000 00010000000ai 167  Distributing GPS Time    occ eee cee cece ccc ec cece ec eecceceeeeeceeees 169  Distributing Non UTC Time                                                    170  Configuring SNNP  2 2 0 2    0 00 c cece eee eceeceeeeecceceeteeeeeees 171  NA 172    Installation Guide    To install the SyncServer in a production environment  or some other of long term instal   lation  follow the steps in this Installation Guide  To getthe SyncServer up and running  quickly in order learn about its features  consult the Quick Start Guide  on page 1      Unpacking  Open the SyncServer packaging carefully to avoid damaging its contents   Verify that the box contains the following standard items       Printed Quick Start Guide  a SyncServer Network Time Server    VAC Power cord  unless 48VDC option is ordered      u GPS antenna kit  a 12V GPS antenna  a PVC antenna mounting tube  a 50 ft  Belden 9104
3.      ATTENTION     vitez de couper le courant   lectrique pendant que le SyncServer fonctionne   Veuillez fermer le syst  me d exploitation avant d enlever le courant     CAUTION  Lithium Battery    The SyncServer contains a Lithium Battery that maintains the system s Real Time Clock   RTC  when the SyncServer s power is off  Replace the Lithium Battery only with the same  or equivalent type  Do not dispose of the Lithium Battery in a fire or incinerator  or the battery  may explode  Follow disposal regulations in your area for Lithium Battery disposal     ATTENTION   Le SyncServer contient une batterie de lithium pour maintenir l horloge en  temps r  el pendent que le courant est debranch    Remplacez la batterie de lithium seule   ment avec une batterie de type   quivalent  Ne vous d  barrassez pas de la batterie de lithium  dans un feu ou un incin  rateur  car la batterie pourrait exploser  D  barrassez vous de la bat   terie usag  e de lithium selon les instructions du fabricant     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 123    This page intentionally left blank    Tasks    In this section    Installation Guide      cece cece cece eceeceeeceeeeeeeeees 126  Unpacking  e NO NAP  shan tea msaesodaenesacs botica 126  Rack Mounting                                   000a aaraa aaan 127  Grounding the SynCSETVET  127  Connecting VAC POovveT  127  Electrical Installations in Norway and Svveden           0000000000000000000000000000000000i 128  Connecting VDC Povver  0000000000000000 a000 oada 
4.      Circuit Overloading  Observe the power ratings on the SyncServer s nameplate and the  additional load the SyncServer may place on the supply circuit      Proper Grounding  Maintain reliable grounding  earthing  of rack mounted equipment     Grounding the SyncServer    u For VAC power  verify that a properly grounded three prong outlet is available for the  standard power cord    a Connect the Chassis Grounding Screw on the rear panel to a reliable earth ground    a Verify that the equipment rack and other equipment are grounded correctly     WARNING  Grounding    Symmetricom recommends that the user connect the chassis grounding screw to a reliable  earth ground     AVERTISSEMENT   Symmetricom recommande que le chassis soit reli   a une terre fiable     Connecting VAC Power    For units equipped with the standard VAC power supply   a Verify that the power switch  located on the rear panel  is off   Press  O       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 127    Tasks       Connect the VAC Input connector on the rear panel to a grounded three prong outlet  using the standard power cord supplied     CAUTION  VAC Power    a The VAC Power Supply specification reflects the overall Power Supply ratings  For UL  and CE compliance the Power Supply must only be operated at 100   240 VAC  50 60  Hz     a The SyncServer should only be plugged into a grounded receptacle   ATTENTION      a Les sp  cifications d approvisionnement de courant alternatif ci dessus refl  tent les esti   mations globales d
5.      Web Interface  The S300 and S350 web interface is compatible with     a Internet Explorer 7 and 8  a Firefox 3 x    Software    Upgrades  Symmetricom makes software updates available as free downloads on the Internet     Users are required to register in order to download software  Some export restrictions may  apply     Licenses    This product contains licensed third party software  including software available under the  GPL licensing scheme  The text of each license is available in the  License  folder located on  the Product Information CD ROM that is supplied with the SyncServer  Additionally  these  licenses and the source code for the related public software can be obtained by contacting  Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v      These licenses include  but are not limited to the following     a Apache Software License   a NTP Software License   a GNU General Public License   a UCD SNMP Software License    By using the SyncServer  the user agrees to the terms of these licenses     Failure Detection and Reporting    The SyncServer is self monitoring during normal operation  To the extent possible  any fail   ures in the unit are isolated  to differentiate them from input signal failures  and reported  The  SyncServer provides debug and troubleshooting variables of the current status of the unit at  the request of an administrator     Page 120 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Warnings and Cautions    Warnings and Cautions    WARNING  Grounding    Symmetricom recommends
6.      o Hardware Clock when locked     16 255 Unsynchronized  unreachable        For example  the SyncServer is       stratum 1 when the Hardware Clock  stratum 0  is synchronized to an input reference  in  holdover mode  or in freerun mode    a stratum 2 through 15 when it is synchronized to a remote NTP server    a stratum 16 when it is unsynchronized  indicating that it is searching for a valid source of  timing information     The settings on the NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect stratum behavior     precision  This is a signed integer indicating the precision of the selected peer clock  in sec   onds to the nearest power of two  A typical value is  18 for a Hardware Clock where the  uppermost 18 bits of the time stamp fractional component have value  indicating a precision  in the microsecond range     root distance  also root delay   This isa measure of the total round trip delay to the root of  the synchronization tree  A typical value for a SyncServer operating at stratum 1 would be O  since the SyncServer is a root of the synchronization tree For other stratum levels  an appro   priate value is displayed  Depending on clock skew and dispersion  this value could be pos   itive or negative     root dispersion  This is a signed fixed point number indicating the maximum error relative  to the primary reference source at the root of the synchronization subnet  in seconds  Only  positive values greater than zero are possible     reference ID  This is a four byte field us
7.      symmCmipManagement OBJECT IDENTITY  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    This is the root object identifier for CMIP based objects         symmNetworkManagement 1      symmSnmpManagement OBJECT IDENTITY  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    This is the root object identifier for SNMP based objects    Hz   symmNetworkManagement 2      symmTimePictra OBJECT IDENTITY   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    This is reserved for objects related to Symmetricom s TimePictra  products        symmSnmpManagement 1      symmBroadband OBJECT IDENTITY   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    The subtree that contains objects related to Symmetricom s GoWide  products        symmSnmpManagement 2      symmTTM OBJECT IDENTITY   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    The subtree that contains objects related to Symmetricom s  Timing  Test and Measurement products        symmSnmpManagement 3      productsOBJECT IDENTIFIER      symmTTM 1   experiment OBJECT IDENTIFIER      symmTTM 99   ts20000BJECT IDENTIFIER      products 1   ntsOBJECT IDENTIFIER      products 2   ts21000BJECT IDENTIFIER      products 3   s1000BJECT IDENTIFIER      products 4     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 173    Tasks    syncserverOBJECT IDENTIFIER      products 5   xliOBJECT IDENTIFIER      products 6   versionOBJECT IDENTIFIER      syncserver 1   ntpSystemOBJECT IDENTIFIER      version 1   tymingOBJECT IDENTIFIER      version 2   gpsOBJECT IDENTIFIER      version 3   dialupOBJECT IDENTIFIER      version 4   netOBJECT IDENTIFIER      version 5   etcOBJECT I
8.     2  Onthe NTP   Autokey Client page  select the Identity Scheme that was used to generate the  keys     3  Enter the Server Password or Client Password used at the time the user generated the cer   tificates and keys     a Ifthe Identity Scheme is PC or GQ  enter the Server Password     a Ifthe Identity Scheme is IFF  enter the Client Password used at the time the user  generated the certificates and keys     4  Use the BROWSE buttons to locate and upload the key or certificate files     Page 154 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Enabling Secure Login      Ifthe Identity Scheme is PC  upload the Server Host Key File and Server Cer   tificate File   a Ifthe Identity Scheme is IFF or GQ  upload the Client Group Key File   5  Click the INSTALL button  This copies the files to the SyncServer     6  Click the RESTART button  This restarts the NTP daemon  putting all of the keys into  effect     Using Autokey on a generic NTP device    Consult the manufacturer s documentation  if available  or consult http      support ntp org bin view Support ConfiguringAutokey     Enabling Secure Login    Logging into the SyncServer securely  open an https session with port 443  helps protect  sensitive information when the user is performing sensitive tasks  such as creating new user   names and passwords  or viewing and transferring MD5 authentication keys or autokey cer   tificates     To enable secure login     1  Login to the web interface  using a normal http connection      2  Onthe SYSTEM   Gener
9.     Port   Factory Default    Default   With the default setting  the NTP daemon automatically  detects and uses a valid network port to communicate with configured NTP server s    Depending on the IP routing infrastructure  this is typically LAN1  The user can override this  by selecting a specific network port  If so  the address must be specified using an IP address  instead of a DNS name  The Porf setting is only available for Server  Peer  Broadcast  and  Multicast associations     Burst    Burst  When the server is reachable  send a burst of eight packets instead of the usual  one  The packet spacing is about two seconds  This is designed to improve timekeeping  quality for server associations  This setting should only be used in agreement with the  administrator of the remote NTP device as the traffic load may be onerous     Page 32 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP   MD5 Keys      iBurst  When the server is unreachable  send a burst of eight packets instead of the usual  one  As long as the server is unreachable  the packet spacing is about 16s to allow a  modem call to complete  Once the server is reachable  the packet spacing is about two  seconds  This is designed to speed the initial synchronization acquisition with the server  command     Version  Specifies the version number to be used for outgoing NTP packets  Versions 1 4 are  the choices  with version 4 the default     Minimum   Maximum Poll Interval  These options specify the minimum and maximum poll inter   vals f
10.     Tasks    Also see  Distributing Non UTC Time  on page 170  and TIMING   HW Clock  on page  48    In most cases  the user sets the time manually when   u The Hardware Clock s Input References aren t available  or don t provide time  10MHz   1PPS    u NTP associations that are capable of providing time to the SyncServer aren t available     Note  In the following instructions  enter UTC time using the 24 hour format  For example   instead of 06 00 PM  enter 18 00     Using the keypad display   1  Press the MENU button    2  Use the number buttons to select 2  Display and 1  Time Entry   3  Enter the UTC date and time    4  For Set HW Clock to FreeRun   select 1  OK     Using the web interface   1  On the TIMING   HW Clock page  enter the UTC date and time    2  Set Forced Timing Source to Free Run    3  Enter the UTC date and time    4  Click APPLY    Note  Once Forced Timing Source is set to Free Run  the Hardware Clock doesn t use the Input  References until the user sets Forced Timing Source back to Auto  If synchronizing NTP asso   ciations are available  the SyncServer s NTP daemon may synchronize with one of them  instead of the Hardware Clock     Using the Command Line  1  Login to the command line interface   2  Enter the SETTIMEOFYEAR command followed by the time in one of the following formats     X Y  a mm dd yyyy hh mm ss x    Yyyy ddd hh mm ss x    MON dd yyyy hh mm ss x    hh mmiss x    In  x y  format     u X  UTC seconds  0 59   u y   fractions of a second  
11.     User 1 10  Enter the email address of the individuals who should receive email notifications  of alarms     LOGS    System Event Log    The Logs page provides access to system activity and messages that are generated by the  various subsystems in the SyncServer  The logs are separated by function  The logging  behavior can be configured using the ADMIN   Logs Config page  Each of the logs records a  series of time stamped events     In the case of the system  auth  daemon  kern and messages logs  the entries take the stand   ard form defined by the syslog daemon  These entries are     date time system facility message  Here  system  is the hostname that generated the mes   sage  The  facility  is a component of the system generating the message  This could be any   thing like the kernel itself  system daemons and even applications  Finally  there is the text of  the message itself  Here are two messages on the system SyncServer  One is from dae   mon log and the other from the kernel    Sep 19 19 20 26 SyncServer ntpd 3577   ntpd 4 2 0b 1 1396 0 Tue Aug 9    01 05 42 UTC 2005  7   Sep 10 00 06 18 SyncServer kernel  Jida Driver installed       In the case of the event log  the entries take the form of     Date time user source description    Here  user  is the user logged into the web interface   source  is the IP address of the remote  system using the web interface and  description  provides information regarding the nature    Page 84 997 01520 02 Rev  C    WIZARDS   1st
12.    127  WARNING  Grounding                               e 127  Connecting VAC Porver  ienesa a a ELE 127  GAUTIONEVAC POWER  occ  sonnei iii 128  Electrical Installations in Norway and Sweden                                      128  Connecting VDC Povver  00000000000 0000000000 aoaaa arara annan 128  WARNING  VDC Povver  129  Telecommunications  Modem  Interfaces    129   CTA AA 130  WARNING  GPS Antenna    000 anaana anana aoaaa aaao Laaa aaao D anaana 130  Selecting a Site for the Antenna        131  Installing the GPS Antenna  e cece c eee e cee ce eee e cee eeeeeeeeeees 132  Operating in  Window Mode          00000a00000000 000000000000 0000a00o 00au aaraa 0101an 133  Verifying the GPS Installation  135  GPS Cable Configurations Options                 e cece eee cece ec ceeeeeeeeees 135    Configuring LANI    138    CAUTION  DHCP Not Available     00 0 0aaa aoaaa aaan a oaaao anaana aandaa nadaan aoaaa  139  Logging in to the Web Interface    139   Using the 1st Setup VVizard  139  Configuring the Network POrts  139  Adding Server Associations       0 00000000000000 00000000000000 200020222 22n2222n 140   Using the Other Input References  140  Troubleshooting  2 00 0    0 0    aaa 141  PASSHVOF ASH ci mis   ka pa bank els teat ee dt ento eta dela pe 141  Alarms and Notification    141  NTP Clients    Sms ear se ne ed lan ro pa ema la a naa sn bad 141  Upgrading System Software  ooo 142   N  b Interfac   ii e Aaa 144   USINE NT Res  Sen ae a e e A 144  Adding Server Ass
13.    140  144 145  140 141  144   164   72  80  91  116  143    65  156    123  139  123  160  123  156  112  122  128  116   166   111   187   95  100  144  187  6   65  138  158  140  145  148  165   171   150    Page 197    Index    Configuring the Network Ports 139  141  Configuring the Sync Server 1  163  Connecting and Finding a Signal 162  Connecting VAC Power 127  Connecting VDC Power 128  Console RS 232 Port 100  Contact Information iv  Copyright 111  Creating a Backup File 143  157 158  Creating a New User 166  D  Deleting a Current User 167  Distributing GPS Time 49  169  171  Distributing Non UTC Time 49  168  170  E  EMC Standards 118  Enabling Password Recovery 166  Enabling Secure Login 151 152  154 155  Environmental 113  Estimating Worst Case Time Error when GPS is Unavailable 167  F  Factory Default Settings 65  Factory Default Settings for Alarms 68  77  141  Failure Detection and Reporting 120  Front Panel 100  G  Glossary 187  GPS 187  GPS Antenna 111  115  GPS Cable Configurations Options 111  133  135  GPS Position and Operating Mode 57  GPS Receiver 110  Grounding the SyncServer 127  H  Halting the SyncServer 3  112  144  156  159  Hardware Clock 16  25  49  188  l  IEEE 1588 2008 Annex J Recommended Default Settings 45  Input References 188  Installation Guide 126  Installing the GPS Antenna 132  Introduction 160  IRIG Control Function Bits 107 109    Page 198 997 01520 02 Rev  C    IRIG In  Timecode In   IRIG Out  Timecode Out     Keypad Display  Keypa
14.    BIOS  512KB FLASH memory used on the ETX module for system BIOS  This part is sol   dered to the ETX module  This part is not reprogrammed in normal operation  The con   tent in this device is non volatile and there is no procedure to clear this memory     86 611x PCB    512MB CompactFlash Primary  J3   The 512MB CompactFlash device is installed on the  86 611x PCB  This part is used as a virtual Hard Drive by the ETX Module s x86 proc   essor  There is no procedure to clear this memory  This part is socketed  J3     512MB CompactFlash Secondary  J4   The 512MB CompactFlash device is installed on  the 86 611x PCB  This part is used as a virtual Hard Drive by the ETX Module s x86 proc   essor  There is no procedure to clear this memory  This part is socketed  J4     U41 is a Xilinx XC25200 FPGA that is re programmed each time the board is powered  up  The program for this part is contained in J3 s CompactFlash memory and is down   loaded into U41 by U39  The content of this device is volatile and is lost when the board is  powered down  This part is soldered to the PCB    M93C46 1Kb Serial Microwire EEPROM for Intel 82551ER Fast Ethernet Controller con   figuration  U34   This non volatile part is used at power on to initialize registers in the  Intel Fast Ethernet Controller  This part is not reprogrammed in normal operation  This  part is a DIP that is mounted in an 8 pin socket    M93C46 1Kb Serial Microwire EEPROM for Intel 82541ER Gigabit Ethernet Controller  configura
15.    Parity   Odd  None  Even  The parity setting of the Sysplex Out port  should match that of the  receiving device    Flywheel Quality Character   The user can set the Flywheel Quality Character to      Ga   a  F   for Flywheel Quality Character      space     About Sysplex and the Hardware Clock    To achieve the highest levels of precision and accuracy  the Sysplex Timer port gets its time  directly from the Hardware Clock  The Hardware Clock synchronizes with the highest prior   ity Input Reference  e g  GPS  Timecode      With the S300 and 5350  if the Input References become unavailable  and Holdover expires   the Hardware Clock synchronizes to the time the NTP daemon gets from other syn   chronizing NTP associations  if any are present   The default configuration includes three  NTP servers on the Internet  If no synchronizing NTP associations are present  the Hard   ware Clock is unsynchronized and uses the internal oscillator to keep time     In the S200  S250  and S250i  if the Input References become unavailable  and Holdover  expires  the Hardware Clock is unsynchronized and uses the internal oscillator to keep time     The time quality character at the end of the Sysplex output string reflects the synchronization  state of the Hardware Clock  The user can select the time quality character used after hold   over expires and the hardware clock is     a Synchronized to the NTP daemon  or  a Using the internal oscillator to keep time     This setting is called the Fl
16.    Web Interface       u Grave accent         Tilde       m Whitespace characters  space  tab  linefeed  carriage return  formfeed  vertical tab etc    a Non ASCII characters      u Non printable characters    Passwords  Length  The password can have a maximum of 64 characters in length     Character set  Charset     Passwords must contain  at minimum  either a mix of upper and lowercase letters  or a mix of  letters and numbers     Passwords are limited to the following printable ASCII characters       Upper case letters  A Z    a Lower case letters  a z    u Numbers  0 9    a Tilde          Most standard ASCII keyboard symbols  i e        amp    _           lt  gt         Passwords may NOT be all lowercase  all uppercase  all numeric  or match the username   They additionally may NOT contain any of the following    m Single quote   apostrophe          u Grave accent       a Plus       m Backslash  Y    m Whitespace characters  space  tab  linefeed  carriage return  formfeed  vertical tab etc     a Non ASCII characters      u Non printable characters    STATUS   General    Overall System Information    Hostname  The network hostname of the SyncServer  which can be configured on the  SYSTEM   General web page     Model  The model number of the SyncServer   m Serial Number  The unique serial number of the SyncServer     Local Time  The local time  determined by the time zone setting on the TIMING   Time Zone  web page     Page 12 997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS   Network    m Re
17.    a Relier le SyncServer    une prise de courant avec contact ad  quat de mise a la terre     Power Switch    Description The power switch provides a method to shut off the VAC power   Also see Halting the SyncServer  on page 3     Physical    Size  in   1 75 in  high x 17 in  wide x 11 25 in  deep   Size  cm  4 5 cm high x 43 2 cm wide x 28 6 cm deep  Weight 8 Ibs   3 7 kg w  standard oscillator or optional OCXO  9 Ibs   4 1 kg w  optional rubidium oscillator    Page 112 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Environmental    Mounting Standard 19 in   48 2 cm  EIA Rack System  rack mount ears  tapped holes for Telco  mid mounts and all necessary mounting hardware included     Standards NEBS  Network Equipment Building System  compatible  Chassis depth  lt 12 in   30 5  cm  with an allowance for attached cable radius     Environmental    Operating Temp 0   to  50  C  432  F to  122  F   Storage Temp  10   to  70   C   14   F to  158   F   Humidity 0   95   non condensing   Altitude 0   4000 meters AMSL    WARNING  Install the SyncServer to allow adequate airflow through and around the unit   Symmetricom recommends leaving 1 4 in   3 6 cm  above and below the SyncServer or  enough space to allow 5 CFM     AVERTISSEMENT   Installez le SyncServer pour permettre un flux d air autour et a trav   ers l unit    Symmetricom recommande de laisser 1 4 in   3 6 cm  au dessus et au dessous  du SyncServer ou assez d espace pour permettre 5 CFM     Shock and Vibration    The SyncServer has been designed 
18.    a When this feature is enabled  the SyncServer sends warnings messages if the user  makes settings changes and navigates away from the page without clicking the APPLY  button  This reduces the possibility of accidentally losing unsaved changes    a When this feature is disabled  the SyncServer suppresses these warning messages     Save Configuration Changes when Submitted   Enabled by default     a When this feature is enabled  the SyncServer updates the configuration backup file in  non volatile memory when the user applies or saves changes to the configuration  This  may slow the web interface s response time  but ensures that the current configuration is  backed up and will be restored if the SyncServer is rebooted    a When this feature is disabled  the SyncServer does not update the backup file when the  user applies or saves changes to the configuration  This may improve the web interface s  response time to applied changes but leaves the backup file unchanged  This option can  be useful for keeping a  known good configuration  available while trying out exper   imental configurations  If the experimental configurations aren t satisfactory  use the    Page 70 997 01520 02 Rev  C    ADMIN   Users    WIZARDS   Restore page to restore the known good configuration  Once the desired con   figuration is reached  manually save the configuration backup file to non volatile memory  using the WIZARDS   Backup page     Send Browser hint to not Auto Complete Passwords   Disabled
19.    daemon log  Notice   kern log  Notice   syslog  Notice   messages  Debug  Info  Notice  Warning  Remote Log System  Null    ADMIN   Relays  Alarm Relay  Off  no activation on any alarm   System Restart Delay  60 minutes    ADMIN   RADIUS  RADIUS Authentication  Disabled    SERVICES   Startup    Page 68 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Web Server  On  Auto  NTP  On  Auto  SNMP  On  Auto  SSH  On  Auto  Sysplex  On  Auto  Time  On  Auto  Time UDP  On  Auto  Daytime  On  Auto  Telnet  Off   System Control  Run    SERVICES   HTTP  Security  Standard  Port 80  Only    SERVICES   SSH   Protocol  SSH 1  amp  SSH 2   Log Level  INFO   Server Key Bits  768   Key Regeneration  3600 Seconds    SERVICES   Email  SMTP Gateway  Null    User1 10  Null    SYSTEM   Options    Use this page to install available options     SYSTEM   Options    See  How to Activate the PTP Option  on page 41 to install the PTP option    This page gives     ADMIN   Web    Use this page to     The SyncServer serial number for use in obtaining the option key    A text box for entering the option key    Two text boxes showing both the available options and installed options   Buttons to apply the available options or cancel the process       Configure the appearance and information displayed on the login page     a Modify the behavior of the web interface     997 01520 02 Rev  C    Page 69    Web Interface    Login Page Configuration  The settings in this section configure the Login page to     m Display status information
20.    tilde  denotes that the remote node is broadcasting to the SyncServer     Local  The IP address of the SyncServer network port at the local end of the NTP asso   ciation  For the Hardware Clock it is  127 0 0 1   the IP address of the loopback port     St  The stratum level of the remote clock in the NTP hierarchy  Lower values are given more  emphasis  For the local Hardware Clock  stratum O is a special value that indicates the Hard   ware Clock it is synchronized by a  timing root  reference such as GPS  Values in the range  of 1 through 15 indicate the number of steps the remote NTP connection is from its timing  root  Stratum 16 is a special value that indicates that the remote connection is not syn   chronized  The stratum reported by the SyncServer is incremented by one from its syn   chronizing peer  For example  while synchronized to the Hardware Clock  Stratum 0   the  stratum of the SyncServer is one  Stratum 1      Poll  The length of the interval  in seconds  with which the SyncServer polls the remote  server  usually starting at 64 seconds and gradually increasing to 1024 seconds  Valid values  range from 16 to 65535  increasing by powers of 2  The polling interval for the Hardware  Clock is fixed at 16 seconds  The user configured Minimum and Maximum Poll Interval set   tings on the NTP   Config page limit this interval     Reach  This is an 8 bit shift register that keeps track of the last 8 attempts to reach the remote  end of the association  New bits are
21.   In the remaining formats     a mm   month 01 through 12     dd   day 01 through 31      u ddd   day of year 001 through 366    yyyy   four digit year    Page 168 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Distributing GPS Time    a MON   first three letters of the month  e g    JAN    a hh   hours 00 through 23       mm   minutes 00 through 59       SS    seconds 00 through 59      u X  fractions of a second    The SETTIMEOFYEAR command does not set the Hardware Clock to Free Run mode     Distributing GPS Time    SyncServers can distribute GPS time in place of UTC time   To distribute GPS Time     1  On the TIMING   HW Clock page  select the checkbox next to Ignore UTC Corrections from  GPS Reference    2   Recommended  On the TIMING   HW Clock page  disable all the references except GPS  by deselecting the Enable checkbox next to each one    3  Click the APPLY button    4  Onthe NTP   Config page  delete all the NTP associations except Hardware Clock   Excep   tion  Keep NTP associations that are also configured to distribute GPS time instead of  UTC     5  On the SERVICES   Startup page  under System Control  select Reboot and click the  APPLY button    6   Optional  After the SyncServer restarts  compare the seconds on the front panel time dis   play with some other accurate time display  The GPS time should be ahead of the UTC  or standard time display by the value of the GPS UTC Offset     CAUTION  NTP time is based on the UTC time scale  Distributing GPS time over NTP is  non standard an
22.   Pre Daemon Rene Ma   TY         ADMIN   Logs Config    System Log Configuration    Use this page to configure the SyncServers logging subsystem  The SyncServer uses klogd  and syslogd  the standard logging facilities  What is logged and where it is logged is based on  the options selected in this page  A default set of options is preconfigured that should provide  a level of detail sufficient for the majority of applications  Each entry is broken down into facil   ity and priority  where facility is the part of the system such as the kernel or the application  daemons and priority indicates the severity of the message  The priority ranges from   Emerg   which represents only very significant events like kernel panics to  Debug   where  even debug messages are logged  Messages are generally logged to different files to allow  easier parsing  The messages file is unique however in that its default configuration captures  all messages flowing through the logging daemons  But  due to the high volume of traffic  it is  cleared at each power cycle or reboot     Note  Most users should leave the logs configured in the default manner unless directed to  make changes by Symmetricom technical support   Log Types    syslog  syslog holds messages about system level events  Examples of system events are  privilege changes  e g   sudo  and messages about regularly schedules events such as cron     auth log  The authentication log contains entries regarding authentication events from logi
23.   Relier ce syst  me d antenne ou de c  ble ext  rieur  avec un contact ad  quat de mise    la terre pour assurer une protection contre l a   ccumulation des charges statiques et du voltage  La section 810 du code   lectrique  national  ANSI NFPA 70  au Canada  partie 1 du code   lectrique canadien  fournit des  informations concernant le rattachement    une mise a la terre du mat et de la structure  le  rattachement    une mise a la terre du fil d entr  e    une unit   de d  charge d antenne  la  taille des conducteurs pour la mise    la terre  le placement de l unit   de d  charge d a   ntenne  le reliment aux   lectrodes de la mise    la terre  et les conditions requises pour  electrode de la mise    la terre      Gardez l Espace Libre d Antenne des Lignes Electriques ou des Circuits a Haute Tension   Local   isez un puits ext  rieur de syst  me d antenne loin des lignes   lectriques et des circuits de  lumi  re   lectrique ou de puissance a fin qu il ne touche jamais ces sources d   nergie s il  devait faillir  En installant une antenne  ne touchez jamais les lignes   lectriques ou d a   utres sources d   nergie  sous peine de danger d   lectrocution mortelle     WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude    GPS position and altitude are for timing purposes only  They are not intended for navigation  or other critical applications     AVERTISSEMENT   La position et l altitude de GPS sont seulement pour la syn   chronization  Elles ne sont pas pr  vues pour la navigation ou d autr
24.   SCI 16     57000 NTP pack 5 5000 packets per NTP activity vvithin the last  ets per second   second  second        Alarm  VajorAlam No Gumen7Enabled Alam     Also see Stratum  on page 194      KeypadDisplay    The keypad display displays the time  status information  and provides functions described  by Keypad Display Interface  on page 89      Keypad   Description 19 button firm silicone rubber keypad  Functionality User input device   Arrow keys  Left  Right  Up  Down   Numeric keys  O through 9   Command keys ENTER  CLR  TIME  STATUS  MENU    Display  Description 256 x 32 pixel vacuum fluorescent display  VFD   Functionality Displays time  status  and functions  User configurable brightness levels     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 101    Specifications    Rear Panel          The following elements are located on the rear panel  from left to right     Radio  LF Radio Module     Description  The optional LF Radio Module  LFR  can be purchased with the SyncServer or sep   arately  The frequency must be specified at the time of purchase   Timing Accuracy  Variable  depending on conditions   Transmitters      JJY  40 kHz      JJY  60 kHz    a WWVB  60 kHz     DCF 77  77 5 kHz  Option part numbers       u 1520R LFR40 KITSyncServer 40 kHz LFR Kit     1520R LFR60 KITSyncServer 60 kHz LFR Kit   a 1520R LFR77 KITSyncServer 77 5 kHz LFR Kit    Modem    Description Provides dial up time service over ordinary telephone lines  POTS   Functions as a  stratum 1 NTP server association  not as
25.   SYNTAX INTEGER  0  1   ACCESS read only   STATUS mandatory  DESCRIPTION    Force authentication       Hz  ntpSystem 16     ntpSysPktsReceived OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX INTEGER  0  32768    ACCESS read only   STATUS mandatory   DESCRIPTION    This variable is a rollover counter which reflects   the number of ntp packets received by the SyncServer   It is valid for all versions of the SyncServer     Hz  ntpSystem 17     ntpSysMode OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAX INTEGER    unspecified  0     symactive  1     sympassive  2     client  3     server  4     broadcast  5     reservedctl  6     reservedpriv  7     ACCESS read only  STATUS mandatory  DESCRIPTION    An integer indicating the NTP association mode  and are coded as follows     O  unspecified  1 symmetric active    Page 178 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    2 symmetric passive   3 client   4 server   5 broadcast   6 reserved for NTP control messages  7 reserved for private use    Hz  ntpSystem 18     ntpSysVersion OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION  The version of the NTP daemon on the system    Hz  ntpSystem 19    tymingStatus OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Indicates what status the Hardware Clock considers  itself to be as a timing source defined as follows     Good HW Clock has a valid time reference   Bad HW Clock has no valid time reference        tyming 1     tymingSource OBJECT TYPE   SYNTA
26.   This is convenient for monitoring status without logging in  par   ticularly if LAN 1 is on a private administrative network      Remove status and information that identifies the SyncServer from the login page  This  makes it more difficult for unauthorized users to recognize the SyncServer via its web  interface     The login page choices are     m Plain  Login page does not contain any identifying text or graphics     Graphic  Login page contains identifying text  graphics  and user selected status infor   mation     The configurable system information includes the following choices       Title  A user determined text string at the top of the login page    a Time  Hostname and LEDs  The local time  the hostname  and the status LEDs    m NTP Status  The NTP Stratum and Reference ID      Hardware Clock Status  The current Sync Source and whether the Hardware Clock is  locked      GPS Receiver Status and the Satellite Count  GPS receiver is providing timing information  and the number of satellites visible      Highest Severity Alarm  The name of the most recent and most severe pending alarm      Version Information and Uptime  The model number  software version  and uptime since the  unit was started      IP Addresses for all Configured LAN Ports  The MAC  IPv4  and IPv6 addresses of the LAN  ports     Save Configuration Settings  Beyond the login page  the user can determine the behavior of the web pages   Warn when Navigating without saving Changes   Enabled by default  
27.   e 1pkt 4 sec  e 1pkt 8 sec  e 1pkt 16 sec  e 1pkt 32 sec  e 1 pkt 64 sec    P2P Delay Interval    The peer to peer P2P Delay Interval controls the number of request packets from the slaves  connected to this unit  See  Sync Interval  on page 42    When the P2P selection is made at the Delay Mechanism  see above   the following selec   tions are available     e 64pkt 1 sec  e 32 pkt 1 sec  e 16 pkt 1 sec  e 8pkt 1 sec  e 4pkt 1 sec  e 2pkt 1 sec  e 1pkt 1 sec  e 1pkt 2 sec  e 1 pkt 4 sec  e 1pkt 8 sec  e 1pkt 16 sec  e 1 pkt 32 sec  e 1 pkt 64 sec    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 43    Web Interface    Priority 1    The priority field affects the result of the Best Master Clock Algorithm  The lower number in  this field will win the BMC calculation  The initialization value of priority1 is specified ina PTP  profile  Choices are     e 0 255  e Default is 128    Priority 2    The priority field affects the result of the Best Master Clock Algorithm  The lower number in  this field will win the BMC calculation  The initialization value of priority2 is specified ina PTP  profile  Choices are     e 0 255  e Default is 128    Domain Number    A domain consists of one or more PTP devices communicating with each other as defined by  the protocol  A domain defines the scope of PTP message communication  state  oper   ations  data sets  and timescale  PTP devices may participate in multiple domains  however   unless otherwise specified in the standard  the operation of the protocol and the
28.  1  AM Amplitude 1 to 8 Vpp  AM Ratio 2 1 to 4 1  Impedance  gt 5k Ohms  Typical system oscillator pull ranges       TCXO 1E 6  1 ppm    a OCXO 5E 7  0 5 ppm       Rubidium 1E 9  1 ppb   Note  If the inbound signal is too noisy  the Hardware Clock may not lock to it     Selectable Time Code Input Formats      IRIGA  a  RIGA AM  with year   a IRIGA DCLS  with year   a IRIGA AM  no year   a IRIGA DCLS  no year      IRIGB  a IRIG B AM  with year   a IRIG B DCLS  with year   a IRIG B AM  no year   a IRIG B DCLS  no year   a IRIG B 1344 AM  a IRIG B 1344 DCLS  a IRIG B AM Legacy TrueTime  a IRIG B DCLS Legacy TrueTime    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 107    Specifications      IRIGE  a IRIG E AM 100Hz  with year   a IRIG E AM 1KHz  with year   a IRIG E DCLS  with year   a IRIG E AM 100Hz  no year   a IRIG E AM 1KHz  no year   a IRIGE DCLS  no year     IRIGG  a IRIG G AM  with year   a IRIGGDCLS  with year   a IRIG G AM  no year   a IRIGGDCLS  no year   u NASA36  u NASA36 AM     NASA36 DC  a XR3 2137  a XR3250Hz    2137 1kHz  a XR3DC    IRIG Out  Timecode Out     Description IRIG Out  provides a selected time code from the SyncServer s Hardware Clock  The  time code format is selected via the Web interface  Amplitude Modulated  AM  and DC Level  Shifted  DCLS  outputs are supported from the IRIG Out BNC  Also see REFERENCES    Timecode  on page 58  and IRIG Control Function Bits  on page 109      Connector IRIG Out  BNC female   DCLS Amplitude  TTL into 50 ohms   AM Amplitude 3 5  0 5 V
29.  ANSI NFPA 70  au Canada  partie 1 du code   lectrique canadien  fournit des  informations concernant le rattachement    une mise a la terre du mat et de la structure  le  rattachement    une mise a la terre du fil d entr  e    une unit   de d  charge d antenne  la  taille des conducteurs pour la mise    la terre  le placement de l unit   de d  charge d a   ntenne  le reliment aux   lectrodes de la mise    la terre  et les conditions requises pour  l   lectrode de la mise    la terre    a Gardez l Espace Libre d Antenne des Lignes Electriques ou des Circuits a Haute Tension   Local   isez un puits ext  rieur de syst  me d antenne loin des lignes   lectriques et des circuits de  lumi  re   lectrique ou de puissance a fin qu il ne touche jamais ces sources d   nergie s il  devait faillir  En installant une antenne  ne touchez jamais les lignes   lectriques ou d a   utres sources d   nergie  sous peine de danger d   lectrocution mortelle     Selecting a Site for the Antenna    Roof Antenna Placement  When selecting a site for the roof antenna  find an outdoor location  that provides the best visibility of the sky and horizon  In most cases  this means locating the  antennain a high location  such as a roof top  Avoid obstructions that could block GPS sat   ellite signals and delay acquisition     A short mounting mast and hose clamps are provided with the roof antenna to mount the  antenna to a pole or the peak of a building  The antenna mounting mast and clamps are well  suited
30.  Austria  Belgium  Germany  Italy  The  Netherlands  Poland  Portugal  Romania  Spain  Sweden  Switzerland  Turkey  and the  United Kingdom    This is a partial list of those services       Germany  Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt  PTB  s timecode service   49 5 31 51  20 38  http   www ptb de en org 4 44  index htm    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 61    Web Interface      United Kingdom  National Physical Laboratory  NPL  s TRUETIME service   44 0891 516  333  http   www npl co uk npl ctm truetime html     Italy  Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale  Galileo Ferrais   IEN  s CTD service   39 166 11  46 15  http   www ien it ar96 tf htm   m Switzerland  Swiss Federal Office of Metrology  s timecode service   41 031 323 32 25   http   www metas ch en labors official time modem index html   m Sweden  SP Swedish National Testing and Research Institute  s timecode service   46 33  41 57 83 http   www v2 sp se metrology timefreq eng timesynch_modem htm     Netherlands  Swinden Laboratorium  VSL   09 00 61 71 81 9  http   nmi nl tijd_service   663 pagina lg en    RESTART button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     REFERENCES   LF Radio    The Low Frequency  LF  Radio is an optional Input Reference for the SyncServer S300 and  S350 m
31.  EN 45014     Symmetricom  Inc   3750 Westwind Blvd   Santa Rosa  Ca 95403 USA    Declares under our sole legal responsibility that the SyncServer Network 1520R SXXX Net   work Time Server  Both AC and DC Models         MODEL 1520R S200  MODEL 1520R S200 DC      MODEL 1520R S250i  MODEL 1520R S250i DC     MODEL 1520R S250  MODEL 1520R S250 DC     MODEL 1520R S300  MODEL 1520R S300 DC  MODEL 1520R S300 RB  MODEL  1520R S300 RB DC     MODEL 1520R S350  MODEL 1520R S350 DC  MODEL 1520R S350 RB  MODEL  1520R S350 RB DC    CONFORMS TO THE FOLLOWING EUROPEAN UNION DIRECTIVES     Safety  a 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Safety as amended by 93 68 EEC    IEC 60950 1 2001  1st Edition      u EN 60950 1 2001    Page 116 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Safety Standards    Electromagnetic Compatibility    2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility     u EN55022  1998  EMC Emissions for ITE  Class A     u EN55024  1998  EMC Immunity for ITE     u EN61000 3 2  2000  Harmonic Current Emissions  a EN61000 3 3  1995  Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Emissions    WEEE  Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive  WEEE  2002 95 EC    The SyncServer Model 1520R_SXXX is considered WEEE Category 3  IT and Tel   ecommunication Equipment  as defined by the WEEE Directive and therefore falls within the  scope of the WEEE Directive     For more information about Symmetricom s WEEE compliance and recycle program  please  visit the Symmetricom s WEEE RoHS website at http   www symmetricom com About  Us WEEE_RoHS_In
32.  IPV6 network addresses     Usage  These icons summarize information about the port     Page 20 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NETWORK   Ethernet      Ka  Checkmark   The user has changed the configuration  but hasn t clicked the APPLY  button at the bottom of the page yet    a e  Management Port   This network port is configured as the management port  web  interface  SNMP  email  DNS           Up Arrow   The physical network port is enabled and functioning  does not indicate a  valid physical connection or configuration       DIC   DHCP   The network configuration is automatic via DHCP   a    Question Mark   Status unknown   usually when there are pending changes          Number  6    Uses IPv6     B  Letter  B    Configured for bonding with another port in a redundant pair     DNS Servers    The DNS Server fields display the IP addresses of Domain Name Service  DNS  servers   The SyncServer requires a valid DNS server address to resolve domain names  such as the     ntp1 symmetricom com    NTP association  If a DNS server isn t provided  NTP associations   NTP   Config  and the SMTP Gateway  SERVICES   Email  must be specified using an  IP address  DNS messages are only communicated through LAN 1 port  The specified DNS  servers must be reachable from the LAN 1 port       Management Port User DNS Servers  Manually enter one or more DNS Server IP  addresses here  if not supplied by DHCP    u Management Port DHCP DNS Servers  Read Only   If LAN 1 has DHCP enabled   and DHCP is confi
33.  NTP   Autokey Client                             a A a d a aE a 35  NT Pret  e nn 36  PTP Option and Time Interval Test    37  Time  lnterval Teste A a OA ka naa Kabag 38  PTP and NTP Performance    38   PTP Management Messages    c cece ccc e cece cece cece ec ceeeeeeeeee 40   How to Activate the PTP Option    41  PAR  Master NAN eae ceed e E AE d   Pe GR as 41   IEEE 1588 2008 Annex J Recommended Default Settings                            45  PESOS to oh tle eee AA a neat lal ae 45  PTP     Performance  ses Las eres es shosh   EEE 46   Charting PTP Performance                                                 47  PTP  Save Restore  0 iii 47   To Save Configuration Settings to a File    48   To Restore Configuration Settings from a File                                     48  TIMING   Time Zone    idee ice 48  TIMING   HW Clock    48  TIMING   Holdo ver  2222222 50  TIMING   Sysplex           iii iii eee eeeeeeeeeceecee 51  TIMING  Time Interval               iiieieee 54  REFERENCES GPS    ia dt da 57   GPS Position and Operating Mode    57  REFERENCES   Timecod      ss e st PAGG NU nent es 58  REFERENCES   Modem  iii 59   RESTART button    EAEE ATE EOE ENEA  62  REFERENCES   LF Radio    ATE OENE 62  REFERENCES   TIJ E  63  SYSTEM    General AN pi kd ka da 63  SYSTEM   Upgrade                                                                  64  SYSTEM   Factory Rasat    0000000000000000 0000000000 aaa 000a oaao oaan n raan 64   Factory Default Settings                 c cece
34.  P2P Packets   E2E Packet Errors  P2P Packet Errors  E2E Queues   P2P Queues  Daemon Resets    PTP   Save Restore    Use this page to Save or Restore PTP Grandmaster Configuration settings     The current PTP Configuration is displayed  reflecting values set up on the PTP Master web  page  An example of settings is     E 2  HI                      Packet TTL Mean Announce Message  Multiplier  1 sec    P2P Delay Interval 1 pkt  O                                              997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 47    Web Interface    To Save Configuration Settings to a File  Click the Save As    button     To Restore Configuration Settings from a File    1  Click the Browse    button   2  Navigate to the file that contains the configuration settings to be restored   3  Click the UPLOAD button    TIMING   Time Zone    Local Time Zone  This setting affects       The time shown on the SyncServer front panel display when the user presses the TIME  button  Also see TIME Button  on page 89      The time output by the IRIG out connector if the Output Type is set to Local on the REF   ERENCES   Timecode page  Also see REFERENCES   Timecode  on page 58    The Time Zone setting does not affect NTP or any of the other timing outputs   To set the time zone  select a profile from the list of Time Zones and click the APPLY button   Each profile contains the offset from UTC to the time zone  plus any rules for daylight saving  time or summer time adjustments   The Time Zones are alphabetically organized 
35.  Setup    of the event  Here is a message showing a successful remote login along with the user id and  IP address of the contact     10 01 2005 22 36 28 admin 192 168 7 16 Successful login    Events  The events log is not configurable  This log is maintained outside syslogd and con   tains configuration and event data related to operations performed in the web interface     syslog  syslog holds messages about system level events  Examples of system events are  privilege changes  e g   sudo  and messages about regularly schedules events such as cron     auth log  The authentication log contains entries regarding authentication events from login or  PAM  Pluggable Authentication Module      daemon log  The daemon log contains entries submitted by the daemon processes that pro   vide the services in the SyncServer  Examples of daemon log entries are NTP changes   SNMP events  and xinetd events     kern log  The kernel log contains entries submitted by the kernel  Examples of kernel events  are network errors or hardware changes     messages  The messages file is something of a catchall file  By selecting various priorities  it  is possible to capture large amounts of data regarding system operation  However  the vol   ume of data becomes impractical to manage quickly  As such  this file is cleared at each  power cycle or reboot     Every 20 minutes  if no new messages were logged  the Syslog daemon logs a    MARK     message to indicate that it is alive and well     WIZARDS   1
36.  Sync   Server has synchronized with one of three default NTP servers   Afterward  if the SYNC  LED transitions from orange to green the SyncServer has synchronized to a Hardware  Clock Input Reference and is operating at stratum 1      To verify other configurations  visit the NTP   Assoc page  After several minutes of operation   Reach should show a value greater than 0 for each association  If Reach equals O  that asso   ciation is  unreachable      For unreachable associations  check the following items     The physical network connections      u The IP addresses of the NTP associations       On the NETWORK   Ethernet page        u Ifthe NTP association uses a domain name instead of an IP address  the man   agement port  LAN 1  must have a valid DNS server address       If Allowed Access is configured  check that it isn t blocking traffic with the NTP  associations and DNS server     Adding Broadcast Associations  Broadcast associations can be used to     a Reduce network traffic when a very large number of NTP clients are present on a LAN       u Reduce the NTP load on the SyncServer if the NTP LED is orange or red   A SyncServer with a broadcast server association broadcasts NTP messages to the subnet  approximately every 64 seconds  After exchanging calibration messages with the server  the    NTP broadcast clients settle into a routine of listening for  and synchronizing with  the NTP  broadcast messages     Symmetricom recommends consulting with your IT department or
37.  The last minute of the day will have 61 sec   onds     PTP Clock Accuracy  The system is not locked to a reference source and is not within the hold   over specifications  The PTP Clock Class is 52     PTP Queue Reset  A PTP queue has filled up and was flushed     PTP Daemon Reinit  The PTP daemon was overloaded and reinitialized     Page 76 997 01520 02 Rev  C    ADMIN   Alarms    Factory Default Settings for Alarms    Auto A Send   Write   HI AE  NTP System Peer Change    noy   Yy   NTP Stratum Change   Y   Major   Y   Y   Y    NTPLeapChange O  o     Y      System Network   V  nw    v      System Upgrade     Minor   Y   Y   Y   System ConfigChange   moy    y  System Heath O  Major   Y   Y   YT  System UpiDovn 1v1 Minor   Y   Y   Y  System Authenticaion     now   TY    PimngNoSouce    y   Major   Y   Y   Y    Timing GPS Source    Y   Major   Y   Y   Y    Timing Timecode Source   y  ny  y  TimingPPSSouce  y  n   vy       Dr 1  Timing GPS Antena Shot   Y   Major     Timing GPS Antenna Open   Y   Major                              lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt   lt     Timing Oscilator DAC Range    Timing RubidimLock    Timing Oscilator Uno    Timing Source Change    Timing Source Lower Accuracy na      T  T    Timing Quality 1e 6 Y  iming Quality 1e 5    EAN me Major   System Reset D  faut Com        T  T  T    iming PLL Unlock       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 77    Web Interface    Auto e Send   Write  O Name   Severa   Bong   te   Song    promesse    vf
38.  USB Ports    Description  Two USB 2 0 ports  USB 1  2     Functionality Connects with a USB flash drive device  which can be used for loading software  upgrades to the SyncServer  as well as for backing up and restoring the SyncServer con   figuration     Connection Requires a compatible USB memory device  such as a SanDisk cruzer micro USB  device  recommended   Not all USB flash drives are compatible with the SyncServer s USB  ports     Also see Keypad Display Interface  on page 89   SYSTEM   Upgrade  on page 64   WIZ   ARDS   Upgrade  on page 87   WIZARDS   Backup  on page 86   WIZARDS   Restore  on  page 86      Console RS 232 Port    Description A bi directional EIA standard RS 232C serial port  Console RS 232  located on the  front panel     Functionality Provides access to a the command line interface for limited status and con   figuration of the SyncServer     Connection DCE  Data Communications Equipment    Use a  straight through  serial cable  not  a  null modem  crossover cable      Data Rates 9600 baud   Parity None   Data Bits 8   Stop Bits  1   Connector Female 9 pin D subminiature   Also see Command Line Interface  on page 95   Pin Assignment  Pinout      Page 100 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Front Panel      1N C  a 21X   a 3Rx   a 4N C     5GND  a 6N C  a 7CTS     8RTS  a 9N C    Status LEDs    The four tricolor LEDs provide the following status information     an Input Reference or the  toa NTP server  modem   reference  NTP Stratum 2 15  NTP Stratum 1     DIT 
39.  a Input Reference to the Hardware Clock    Connector RJ 11   Services ACTS  USNO  TJJY  and ITU R TF583 4  used by PTB and other European timecode  Services     Delay Compensation  ACTS  TJJY   Standards V  92 56K  V 44 and V 42bis data compression  V 42 error correction   Also see REFERENCES   Modem  on page 59  and Using the Modem for Dial up Time Serv   ice  on page 149     Power and Alarm Relays    Description Two relays  The Power relay de energizes when the Sync Server loses or cycles  power  non configurable   The Alarm relay can be configured by the user to de energize when  the SyncServer generates alarms  Also see ADMIN   Relays  on page 80   Specs given for a  resistive load    Connector SPDT relays that connect    dry contacts       Rated load 0 30 A at 125 VAC  1 A at 30 VDC   Max  Carry Current 1 A   Max  Operating Voltage 125 V AC  60 VDC    Page 102 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Rear Panel    Max  Operating Current 1 A  Max  Switching Capacity 37 5 VA  30 W  Min  Permissible Load 10 uA   10 mVDC    Relay contacts     u Cis Common contact     u NOis Normally Open contact      u NC is the Normally Closed contact     Relay states       C and NC  Normally Closed  C and NO  Normally Open     Closed  connected   De Energized Closed  connected    For example        a When the power is on  the Power relay is energized  providing a closed set of contacts  between C and NO    a When the power is off  the Power relay is de energized  providing a closed set of con   tacts betwe
40.  added to the rightmost end of the register  1 for reached  or O for unreached  and old bits  fall off  the left hand side  The shift register is represented in  octal  For example  by converting  377  from octal to binary  one gets  11111111   indicating  8 successful polls  For a sequence of eight successful polling attempts on a new association   the octal value of Reach increases as follows  1  3  7  17  37  77  177  377  If the value isn t  one of those just shown  there may be a problem polling the remote end of the association  If  the value remains at O  or decreases to 0  the association is becoming unreachable  The  reach value stays 0 if the SyncServer is a broadcast or multicast server     Delay  The total delay  in seconds  of the round trip to the remote end of the NTP association   For example  a value of  0 07817  equals approximately 78 milliseconds  The Delay for the  Hardware Clock is  O   For most NTP associations  typical values range from tens to hun   dreds of milliseconds  The NTP daemon s clock selection algorithm gives preference to  lower Delay values     Offset  The time offset between the SyncServer and the remote server  in seconds  of the last  poll  The NTP daemon s clock selection algorithm gives preference to lower Offset values     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 29    Web Interface    The Offset for the Hardware Clock is usually in the microsecond range  For external NTP  associations  the offset is affected by the time base of the remote node and
41.  aga to a det 187  A E O A PE 187  Hardware ClO aka i o tarda to e lirio bano de e Pe 188  Input References  a aaa 188  Leap Indicator sis re Aa es GG Nan ett fi Baa ob NO ATA se HUG Dion daya 189  NIP ASSOCIATIONS 9 282 eae cht ad banag du a Bp paga pa Mn ne de EN D Bb Ie 189  NTP Daemon  s inner A PN SEEN 190  NTP ATO NAA IR ls ad dad 190  NA 193  PTP  Precision Time Protocol                                                             194  Se E NS 194  Synchronizing NTP association                                                                194  IE AA A A A A RARA ARA  194  Operational Configuration              0 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece aaa 195  paa a kya tahasang bl hal yan Kana DREN as pane blang e Ch dive do tae a ht ed 197    xii    Configuring the SyncServer    Quick Start Guide    In this section    Configuring the SyncServer  ccoo eee eee 1  AS PAY 3  Halting the SyncServer              anaa oaar oaaan inann anannnann 3    This topic guides the user on how to       Configure a SyncServer that still has its original factory configuration      Read the status LEDs on the front panel   a Shut the SyncServer down correctly     For more information about the features and tasks described here  consult the following sec   tions in the main User Guide      Web Interface  on page 9    u Keypad Display Interface  on page 89       u Specifications  on page 99       u Tasks  on page 125     For your convenience  cross references in this Quick Start Guide provide the page
42.  alarm messages  As the system logs are written to a RAM based  volume  messages may be lost ifthe system is rebooted or power cycled or experiences an  unexpected failure  They may also be overwritten if memory is low  Symmetricom rec   ommends rotating log files  if needed  Specifying the DNS name or IP address of a remote  server will configure the SyncServer to send a copy of each message received by the syslog  and kernel log daemons to the remote address  if it is reachable  The remote server can then  be configured to filter the messages using its configuration file     A complete definition of how Syslog is configured may be obtained by consulting the stand   ard syslog conf man pages that are widely available on the Internet     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 79    Web Interface    ADMIN   Relays    The SyncServer S300 S350 has two alarm output relays located on the rear panel  Power  and Alarm     Also see Power and Alarm Relays  on page 102    Relays Configuration    Loss of Power Alarm Relay    Power  This relay de energizes when the SyncServer loses power  lts behavior cannot be  configured     Minor Major Alarm Relay  The user can configure the conditions that de energize the Alarm relay       Any Major Alarm  Alarms with Severity   Major      Any Major or Minor Alarm  Alarms with Severity   Major or Minor    m Off  no relay activation on any alarm   The relay is remains energized except when the Sync   Server loses power or is rebooted     The following pages actions
43.  alimentation d   nergie  Pour la conformit   d UL et de CE l al   imentation d   nergie doit   tre seulement op  r  e    100   240 VCA  50 60 hertz    a Relier le SyncServer    une prise de courant avec contact ad  quat de mise    la terre     Electrical Installations in Norway and Sweden    For Electrical Installations in Norway and Sweden    Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains  connection or through other equipment with a connection to protective earthing   and to a  cable distribution system using coaxial cable  may in some circumstances create a fire haz   ard  Connection to a cable distribution system has therefore to be provided through a device  providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency range  galvanic isolator  see  EN60728 11      Note  In Norway  due to regulation for installations of cable distribution systems  and in  Sweden  a galvanic isolator shall provide electrical insulation below 5 MHz  The insulation  shall withstand a dielectric strength of 1 5 kV r m s  50 Hz or 60 Hz for 1 minute     FOR ELEKTRISKA INSTALLATIONER   NORGE OCH SVERIGE    Utrustning som ar ansluten till skyddande jordning av bygginstallationer genom natuttaget  samband eller genom annan utrustning med en anslutning till skyddande jordning och en  kabel distributionssystemet anvander koaxialkabel  kan i vissa fall framkalla brandfara  Ans   lutning till en kabel distributionssystemet har darfor tillhandahallas genom e
44.  as a typical server room environment   This is the default mode when the SyncServer starts    a Dynamic  The GPS receiver surveys continuously to determine its position and doesn t  switch to another mode  This mode must be initiated by a user  and is appropriate for  mobile applications such as ships  land vehicles  and aircraft  The degree of accuracy this  mode offers is fine for NTP time over networks  but is less than optimal for the timing out   puts available on some SyncServer models      Position Hold  The GPS receiver has completed Survey mode and switched to this  mode  or the user has manually entered a position and  forced  it into this mode  The  accuracy and stability of the SyncServer s timing outputs are optimal when the receiver  has its exact position and is in this mode    Antenna Cable Delay  nS      The user configured value  on the REFERENCES   GPS page  to compensate for GPS signal  propagation from the antenna along the length of the cable to the receiver    Antenna Status    The GPS receiver supplies power to the GPS antenna through the antenna cable  It also  monitors the current to that circuit to detect open or short circuits        u Good  The current to the GPS antenna and cable is normal    a Open  The current is too low  The GPS antenna or cable is probably disconnected or  broken  Some splitters may cause this condition as well    a Short  The current is too high  The GPS antenna or cable probably has a short circuit     Position  The latitu
45.  attach an optional in line amplifier inside the PVC mounting  mast or to replace the standard cable with a longer one   Avoid unscrewing the PVC  mounting mast from the base of the GPS antenna as this may require a vice and lots of  torque     a When extending the length of the cable  observe the recommended configurations in  GPS Cable Configurations Options  on page 135   Avoid exceeding the rec   ommended lengths by combining the standard 50 foot  15 24 m  cable with the  extended length cable     Operating in  Window Mode     The SyncServer can provide can provide excellent synchronization to UTC ifthe GPS  receiver has an accurate fix on its position and one current GPS satellite most of the time   This capability is known as Window Mode     When a good antenna site isn t available  the user may be able to use sites with limited vis   ibility of GPS satellites and reduced signal strength  such as       Indoors  in a window or skylight     Outdoors  on a balcony railing  building corner  or surrounded by tall structures  limited  view     Window Antenna Placement    For window mounted antenna installations  use the window with the best view of the sky  For  windows with equivalent views  orientations that face the equator are preferred  Generally  more satellites will be in view toward the equator than away from it  East or west facing win   dows will also work  Polar facing windows will also work but in general are not preferred  Win   dows that have the best view of th
46.  available     Before upgrading  as a precaution  the user should back up the configuration of the Sync   Server  WIZARDS   Backup   Normally  the SyncServer transfers its settings from one version  of the software to the next  However  if the upgrade process is interrupted  e g   loss of  power   the settings may be lost  Having the backup makes it possible to restore the previous  settings if that happens     The user downloads the software upgrade file from the Symmetricom web site to their work   station and then follows the steps given below for upgrading the software on the Sync   Server     Note  Please avoid decompressing the     tar upgrade file prior to upgrading the SyncServer   For security  the SyncServer will reject any file that has been modified or decompressed and  recompressed  If needed  download a new software file from Symmetricom     Prerequisites for the System Upgrade Alarm to Work    The SyncServer notifies the user when a software upgrade is available  provided all of the fol   lowing items are true       The Check for software upgrades setting is enabled on the SYSTEM   General page  fac   tory default   enabled     m The LAN1 port is configured correctly and has a DNS server on the NETWORK   Ethernet  page  typically configured during installation     u The LAN1 port can reach Symmetricom com on the Internet using port 80  Most proxy  servers and firewall devices allow this type of traffic  but some may be configured to block  it  Consult your netw
47.  by default     a Enabling this setting enhances security  It prompts browsers to suppress the  auto com   plete  and  remember password  features  This makes it more difficult for unauthorized  users to gain access to the SyncServer from an authorized user s workstation or by  exploiting stored browser settings     ADMIN   Users    Use this page to     m Adda new user   a Seta new password      u Enable and configure password recovery  m Send a test email for password recovery    For information about creating and deleting users  or changing passwords and enabling  password recovery  see Managing Users  on page 166      Note  All users have complete administrative privileges     User Creation  Deletion and Password Maintenance    User  Select New User to create a new username or select a current username from the list  to change its settings     Delete Selected User  To delete a current username  select this box and click the APPLY but   ton  The web interface prevents the last remaining username from being deleted     New Username  When User is set to New User  enter the username to create  See also  Prop   erties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Old Password  When User is set to a current username  enter the corresponding password to  authenticate changes being made elsewhere on this page     New Password  To change the password  enter a new password with six or more characters   including lower and upper case letters  or letters and at least one number  See als
48.  cece cece e cece ccceccecceceeeeeeee 65  SYSTEM OPTIONS  s   Core 69  ADMINS WED nik Kan chee te tee a Mts ban ht hos fa tlie ated ok bas aahh 69  ADMIN SUS Cis icc  sitio dd ten dada tds 71  ADMIN S Alarm Shi See SN es R   isa 72   Alarm Descriptions    73   Factory Default Settings for Alarms  200000 c cece cece cee ceeeeceeeeees 77  ADMIN   Logs Config    78  ADMIN RAVS nA AN NAAN NA ee crete nana an ak ea te A kan dns ne 80  ADMIN  RADIUS  023 2 2 dam nk Ka sen KA diia 80  SERVICES Star tupi 2 ta TZ nen Zo IA ida 81  SERVICES AT Pi ui kd h   ee  82  SERVICES    SSH AA ik aag sud dd haban tn denied unes 83  SERVICES AA nn nnnccccnnnnnnncccns 84  AAA A A Maa nA 84    viii    WIZARDS Tte Pi t   LYING SER 85    WIZARDS    NT Re ra th da Bagana o tao   ane 86   WIZARDSSNM Pia kag NAG a a dia 86  NVIZARDS  Backu Pisa asni tee dt 86  WIZARDS   Restore      ooccoocccccccccccccc ccoo ncc conoce 86  WIZARDS   Upgrade  l   0aa 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000002002002 000 00000000020 a 2 2arnn22a 87  Keypad Display Interface                                                                              89  TIME  BUttONS Ls Aha an e LR e e Sn e ra 89  STATUS BUTTON  RARE a AA o rire ar a da Md 90  MENU BUTTON  san nG Re nt SNL 92  Command Line Interface                                                                    aoaaa 95  SPECINCAUONS TO Lufi pe e rs 99  Front Panel  2 aaa 100  USBPOFES capot de E D MP ke 100  Console RS 232 Port    100  Status KEDS i R  el sio CEE 101  Keypa
49.  checkbox on the Login page  This opens an https session with port  443 on the SyncServer  Also see Enabling Secure Login  on page 155      Generating and downloading autokeys  1  Login to the SyncServer securely and go to the NTP   Autokey page   2  Select an Identity Scheme     3   Optional  Create a peer  broadcast  or multicast association using the Server Role and  Server Address fields     Enter an alphanumeric Server Password    If the Identity Scheme is IFF  enter an alphanumeric Client Password   Click the GENERATE button    Download the keys or certificates       Ifthe Identity Scheme is PC  use SAVE AS to download the Server Host Key and  Server Certificate to your workstation one at a time     Ifthe Identity Scheme is IFF or GQ  use SAVE AS to download the Client Group  Key to your workstation   8  Click the RESTART button     NON A    Enabling autokey for a particular NTP association  The Role of the association must be Server  Peer  or Broadcast     After generating the keys or certificates on the SyncServer   If needed  log in to the SyncServer securely    Go to the NTP   Config page    Create or edit an NTP association    Set MD5 Key to Auto    Click the SAVE button    Click the RESTART button     After several minutes go to NTP   Assoc and confirm that Reach for this association is greater  than O  If not  authentication isn t working     ND a 8    D      Uploading autokey keys and certificates to another SyncServer  1  Login to the other SyncServer securely 
50.  coaxial cable      2pipe clamps    Page 126 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    a Product CD  contains the User Guide and other supporting documentation   a SymmTime CD  contains NTP client software      Standard serial cable   m Standard 6 ft  network cable    Please also verify that the box also contains any options purchased with the SyncServer     If the box is missing any items  please contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on  pagev      Rack Mounting    The SyncServer is designed for mounting in a standard 19 inch  48 26 cm  rack  Follow the  rack manufacturer s instructions for mounting the SyncServer     Avoid the following conditions     m Elevated Operating Temperatures  If the SyncServer is installed in a closed or multi unit rack  assembly  the ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than the  SyncServer s Maximum Operating Temperature of 50  C 122  F  Install the SyncServer  in an environment that is compatible with the SyncServer s operating temperature range   which is 0   C to 50   C  or 32   F to 122   F    a Reduced Air Flow  Position the SyncServer with enough space above  below  and adja   cent to the chassis to allow an adequate flow of air so that it may operate safely  Sym   metricom recommends leaving 1 4 in   3 6 cm  above and below the SyncServer or  enough space to allow 5 CFM air flow      Uneven Mechanical Loading  Mount the equipment so as to avoid uneven mechanical load   ing that could cause hazardous conditions 
51.  configured with a  broadcast address  e g   192 168 61 255   the association broadcasts NTP mes   sages from the network interface with the matching IP address  e g    192 168 61 58   Broadcast messages go out to all nodes on the subnet  and are  usually blocked by routers from reaching adjacent subnets  Consult with the net   work administrator to select a correctly scoped address and Time to live value     a This type of association requires authentication on both the server and the clients   See Using NTP Authentication  on page 151      a Typical Usage  Broadcast associations to reduce network traffic with a large  number of NTP clients       Broadcast Client   a Addressing  The user does not specify an address with this setting     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 31    Web Interface    a Description  Creates an association that listens for NTP broadcast messages on  all of the network interfaces  Upon receiving the first broadcast message  the  broadcast client association initiates a brief exchange with the server to calibrate  the propagation delay  Afterwards  the broadcast client association listens to and  gets the time from the broadcast server messages  This type of association  requires authentication on both the server and the clients  See Using NTP  Authentication  on page 151     a Typical Usage  Broadcast client associations can get authenticated time on net   works that have a broadcast server      Multicast Server  Create a Broadcast association with members of a
52.  deleted or edited   a Is configured as a preferred server   server 127 127 45 0 prefer   pseudoaddress for the  timing engine  in ntp conf    a Is displayed at the top of the list   Additionally  the factory default configuration includes three Stratum 1 NTP servers operated  by Symmetricom on the Internet     The user should consider adding NTP servers available on the local network to the list of Cur   rent NTP Associations   Add Edit NTP Association    Use Add Edit NTP Association to edit existing associations or to add new ones  The Sync   Server can have multiple associations  each with a different Role     In the following explanations  the term  SyncServer  means  the local NTP daemon on the  SyncServer      Role    Server     Page 30 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP   Config    a Addressing  Use with IPv4 class A  B and C addresses     a Description  Creates a persistent association between the SyncServer  client   and an NTP node  server   The client synchronizes with the server if the client s  clock selection algorithm selects this server as the best clock  Typical server asso   ciations include  the hardware clock  the factory default NTP servers  and servers  added by the user  Also see system peer mode  client under NTP Daemon  Status  on page 16     m Typical Usage  The user creates a Server association to designate an NTP node  that has an NTP Stratum better or equal to that of the SyncServer  client   Often   the NTP server is another Stratum 1 server with a GPS r
53.  following  functions         Configuring and enabling disabling the LAN1 network port      Setting the time and entering freerun mode    a Adjusting the brightness    a Locking the keypad    a Shutting down the SyncServer       u Backing up and restoring the configuration from the USB port     Upgrading the software from the USB port     Overview    When the SyncServer starts  the display shows the Symmetricom logo followed by booting  messages  After a minute or so  the SyncServer displays the default time screen     The following buttons are user input devices for the keypad display interface         ENTER  Use with MENU   Applies a menu selection or function setting    a CLR  Use with MENU   Returns to the previous screen without saving changes      Left Right Arrow Buttons  In functions  moves the cursor left or right  In status  scrolls a  screen horizontally when   lt previous next gt   is displayed      Up Down Arrow Buttons  In functions  increments decrements the value the cursor is on  In  status  displays the previous next screen      Number Buttons  Enters a number  or selects a numbered menu item     The following three buttons change the function of the display       TIME  Changes the format and contents of the time display   m STATUS  Displays status the network ports and aspects of the SyncServer     MENU  Displays a menu of functions     The following sections cover these three buttons in more detail     TIME Button    Pressing the TIME button repeatedly cha
54.  hostname gt  points to symbolic link from ntpkeygen    Note   lt hostname gt  will be the hostname of the device on which the keys were generated   When the user periodically refreshes the keys file and symbolic link  the keys directive in  ntp conf file does not need to be updated        u For each association that uses authentication  add  key  followed by the key number  For  example    server 192 168 61 54 iburst prefer key 1   peer 192 168 61 58 key 5   server tock usno navy mil   a Edit the trustedkey directive so it includes the key number of every key used for authen   tication  For example    trustedkey 1 5 9 16 11    Note  Ntp conf files do not include associations for NTP clients  However  ifthe NTP server  has clients that use MD5 authentication  the key number specified by the client s server asso   ciation must specified by trustedkey on the server  This is the case with key numbers 9  16   and 11 in the example above     Save the changes and close the file  In vi  press the Esc key and enter    iwq   Restart ntpd  The most reliable way to do this is to reboot the system by entering   shutdown  r now   When the system and ntpd restart  the new configuration should be in effect     Note  Mismatched keys or partially configured authentication may prevent synchronization  between two NTP nodes     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 153    Tasks    Using Autokey    Recommendation  When configuring NTP authentication  log in to the SyncServer securely  by selecting the Secure
55.  italicized      broadcastclient  enable auth   keys  etc ntp keys  trustedkey 1    The key number identified by trustedkey must match the key number on the SyncServer or  broadcast server     To configure a SyncServer as a broadcast client     Configure authentication  For example  use NTP   MD5 to upload the keys file   Add or edit an association on the NTP   Conf page    For Role  select Broadcast Client    For MD5  select the appropriate method and Key if needed    Click the SAVE button     Click the RESTART button  When the NTP daemon finishes restarting  it listens for broad   cast messages     Oak    D      Also see        u Working with Generic NTP Devices  on page 150   u Using MD5 Keys on a SyncServer  on page 151     Using NTP Authentication  on page 151     Adding Multicast Associations    NTP multicasting is similar to broadcasting  but uses a routable multicast address so that the  NTP messages can reach multiple subnets  Use the IANA designated address for NTP mul   ticasting  224 0 1 1  or carefully select another non conflicting address  Also take steps to  protect multicast messages from affecting neighboring networks     Also see Adding Broadcast Associations  on page 146  and NTP   Config  on page  30      Configuring the multicast server    To configure a SyncServer as a multicast server     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 147    Tasks    1  Configure authentication as described in Using NTP Authentication  on page 151     For example  use NTP   MD5 to generate 
56.  ligne corde de t  l  communications  modem  si la corde fournie n est pas  employ  e avec l appareil     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 129    Tasks    IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS    When using your telephone  modem  equipment  basic safety precautions should always  be followed to reduce the risk of fire  electric shock and injury to persons  including the    following     1  Donotinstall modem during a storm   2  Do not use this product near water or in a damp location   3  Avoid routing telephone cords with power cords     Save These Instructions    Using GPS    This section guides the user through the process of selecting a good site for the GPS  antenna  installing the antenna  and how to use GPS when a good site isn t available     WARNING  GPS Antenna       Avoid electrocution and RF safety hazards such as power lines and high energy radio  transmission antennas    m Where potential hazards exist  have a qualified technician perform the installation      Observe local codes and regulations    a Use a lightning arrestor when needed        Antennas not rated for 12 VDC may be damaged when connected to the SyncServer   The GPS antenna supplied with the SyncServer is rated for 12 VDC    m Safe Antenna and Cable Connection  An outside antenna or cable system must be properly  grounded to provide some protection against built up static charges and voltage  Section  810 of the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70  In Canada  part 1 of the Canadian  Electrical Code  provides in
57.  link local address  IPv6 only mode      2  On Off  1  On  Enable the LAN 1 network port     2  Off  Disable the LAN1 network port   all traffic  types   2  Display    1  Time Entry  Enter the UTC date and time using  24 hour format     1  Set HW Clock to Freerun     1  OK  1 e   Apply the entered time to the  Hardware Clock and don t use references     Page 92 997 01520 02 Rev  C    MENU Button    2  Cancel  2  Brightness  Adjust the brightness of the front panel  display   1  Low  Extends display life   2  Medium  3  High    3  12 24  Appears if the TIMING   Time Zone page is set  to a non UTC Time Zone  Selecta 12 or 24 hour clock  format     1  12  AM PM   2  24 Hour  3  Sys Control  System Control   1  Keypad    1  Set Password  Sets the password the Lockout  function  The    first time    the interface asks for  the  Current Password   enter 123  No  password recover or reset feature is available for  the keypad  except to reset factory defaults using  the ADMIN   Factory Reset page      2  Lockout  Password protects the keypad from changes   Asks for confirmation      2  Shutdown  Halts the SyncServer  Press the ENTER button  to confirm  Notifies the user when  System Stopped  OK  to Turn Power Off Now         4  USB  Backs up or restores the configuration to from a USB  flash drive     1  Backup Cfg  Backs up the current configuration of the  SyncServer to the USB drive      2  Restore Cfg  Applies the SyncServer configuration on  the USB drive to the SyncServer      
58.  may de energize the Alarm relay     m SERVICES   Startup  Using Halt or Reboot      NETWORK   Ethernet  Applying changes to the network configuration      All NTP    pages  Using RESTART on any of the NTP related pages   m SYSTEM   Upgrade  Upgrading the firmware    m SYSTEM   Factory Reset  Resetting the configuration to factory defaults     Using the following WIZARDS  1st Setup  NTP  Restore  Upgrade     For more information on major minor alarm states  see ADMIN   Alarms  on page 72      System Restart Delay  Minutes     Use this setting to prevent the Alarm relay from de energizing for a user configured period of  time after the SyncServer starts or restarts  The delay can be set to allow enough time for  unwanted alarm conditions to clear  The factory default setting is 60 minutes  The range is 1  to 99 minutes  This setting only affects the Alarm relay  It does not affect other aspects of  alarm operation     ADMIN   RADIUS    RADIUS authentication provides a method for users to log into a variety of RADIUS enabled  devices using a centrally managed username and password  The SyncServer implements  RADIUS in accordance with portions of RFC 2865 and RFC 2866     RADIUS authentication on the SyncServer is designed for interoperation with UNIX or Linux  based RADIUS servers  versus Windows LDAP implementations     Page 80 997 01520 02 Rev  C    SERVICES   Startup    u When RADIUS is enabled and configured a user can log in to the SyncServer using a  RADIUS username and p
59.  mes   sage and applies it to the GPS time  To generate GPS time  the SyncServer stops applying  the GPS UTC Offset  and uses unchanged GPS time     Configuring the SyncServer to use GPS time affects ALL of the SyncServer s timing outputs   including    a The IRIG output     The Sysplex output      u The NTP  SNTP  Time  and DAYTIME protocol outputs on the network ports     The web user interface   a The front panel time display    Notes     a While configured to distribute GPS time  the SyncServer does not report Leap Indicator  status or perform leap second adjustments    a Regardless of the time zone setting  GPS time is reflected by the seconds in the time dis   play    CAUTION  Switching between GPS and UTC references while Ignore UTC Corrections   from GPS Reference is enabled may have undesirable effects and should be avoided  Sym    metricom recommends disabling and removing all UTC synchronized Hardware Clock Input   References and NTP associations to prevent this from happening     Distributing Non UTC Time    The SyncServer and NTP are intended to operate with UTC as its standard time scale  How   ever  if required  the SyncServer can be configured to operate with other time scales  This  topic provides some useful pointers and tips for doing this     Distributing non UTC time can be accomplished by several methods     a Configuring the SyncServer to distribute GPS time   a Inserting non UTC Timecode    a Manually Setting the Time to non UTC Time   a Synchronizing 
60.  multicast group   The multicast address is a class D address starting from 224 0 0 1   The IANA assigned  224 0 1 1 to be the NTP multicast address   However  user can choose any class D  address that is not used on the local network by other protocols  Routers can be con   figured to transmit multicast messages to adjacent subnets      Multicast Client    a Addressing  Use the same IPv4 class D multicast address as the Multicast Server   potentially 224 0 1 1      a Description  Creates an association that listens for NTP multicast messages on all  of the network interfaces  Upon receiving the first message  the multicast client  association initiates a brief exchange with the server to calibrate the propagation  delay  Afterwards  the multicast client association listens to and gets the time from  the server messages  This type of association requires authentication on both the  server and the clients  See Using NTP Authentication  on page 151     m Typical Usage  Multicast client associations can get authenticated time on net   works that have a multicast server     Note  When authentication is configured  the same authentication scheme is available for all  NTP associations and over all network interfaces     Prefer  The NTP daemon will synchronize with an association marked prefer over an equiv   alent association that is not     Address  The IP address or DNS name of the NTP association    If present  configure the Modem phone number using the REFERENCES   Modem page  
61.  network administrator  before broadcasting NTP  The user should configure the scope of the broadcast address to  cover the intended subnet  Also note that some network routers are configured to block  broadcast messages     Note  To protect against broadcasts from an unauthorized source  the user must configure  NTP authentication on the broadcast server and broadcast clients     For more information  see NTP   Config  on page 30    Creating a broadcast association  To configure the SyncServer as a broadcast server     1  Configure authentication as described in Using NTP Authentication  on page 151    For example  use NTP   MD5 to generate and download keys to your workstation   2  Add or edit an association on the NTP   Conf page     Page 146 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using NTP    For Role  select Broadcast    For Address  enter an appropriate broadcast address for the subnet   For MD5 Key  select the appropriate method  Key or Auto    If selecting Key  also select a key number  1 through 16    Click the SAVE button     Click the RESTART button  When the NTP daemon finishes restarting  it broadcasts NTP  messages every 64 seconds     OO  OP ON Be    Creating a broadcastclient association  To configure an NTP client as a broadcast client  consult the manufacturer s documentation     To configure a generic NTP broadcast client with MD5 authentication  the user would upload  the ntp keys file to the  etc directory and add the following lines to the ntp conf file  example  values
62.  numbers  of topics in the main User Guide     Configuring the SyncServer    Recommended Tasks    GPS antennas not rated for 12 VDC power may be damaged if connected to the Sync Server     1  Mount the standard L1 GPS antenna  supplied  in a location that offers good visibility of  GPS satellites  such as a rooftop or outdoor antenna mast with wide open views of the  sky and horizon  Avoid obstructions and sources of Radio Frequency Interference   Observe building codes and regulations  Also see Using GPS  on page 130  and  WARNING  GPS Antenna  on page 121      2  On the rear panel     Connect the GPS antenna cable  supplied  to the GPS Ant connector     Connect LAN1 and any of the other network ports to the network   a Consult Warnings and Cautions  on page 121  for safety information regarding  grounding and power   a Connect the power and turn the power switch on   3  Using the front panel keypad     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 1    Quick Start Guide    a Configure LAN1 with a static IP address using the MENU button and 1  LAN1       View the LAN1 IP address by pressing the STATUS button repeatedly until the  LAN1 STATUS screen is shown     4  Goto the SyncServer Login page by entering the LAN 1 IP address as the URL in Internet  Explorer     5  Log in  The user name is  admin   The password is  symmetricom    6  Configure the SyncServer using WIZARDS   1st Setup  Select the following options        Configure Password Recovery   Ask the IT department for the IP address of th
63.  on the VDC Power input block are connected to the  chassis  These terminals are normally used to connect to the VDC Power return line     Note  The 48 VDC Operation Model is supplied with two 48 VDC inputs to accommodate  input from an alternate VDC Power Source  Because of diode switching  the polarity can be  plus plus  plus minus  minus plus  or minus minus     WARNING  VDC Power  For the 48 VDC model of the SyncServer     a Use a disconnect device  such as a switch  with the appropriate voltage current rating  when connecting a VDC Power source      Only use the unit in an restricted area    a The screw torque on the Power Terminal Block is 4 5 to 5 3 inch pounds    a The unit chassis must be grounded for proper safety     AVERTISSEMENT    Sur le 48 VDC mod  le du SyncServer     a Utilisez un dispositif de d  branchement  tel qu un commutateur  avec le classement de  tension courant appropri   en connectant une source de pouvoir de DC       u Employez seulement l unit   dans un secteur avec l acc  s limit      a Le couple de vis sur le TB de puissance est livres de 4 5    5 3 pouces    a Le ch  ssis d unit   doit   tre fondu pour la s  ret   appropri  e    Telecommunications  Modem  Interfaces    Caution  To reduce risk of fire use only No 26 AWG  0 128mm2  or larger tel   ecommunications  modem  line cord if the cord supplied is not used with the apparatus     Attention   Pour r  duire le risque d A W G  No 26 d utilisation du feu seulement  0 128mm2   ou de plus grande
64.  online about borrowing a kit for testing Low Frequency Radio  LFR   reception prior to purchasing the LFR option     Using Redundant Ethernet Ports    About Redundant Ethernet Ports    The SyncServer s LAN2 and LAN3 network ports can be bonded together as a single  phys   ically redundant  Ethernet connection with a single IP address  Bonding can be used to  reduce the Ethernet connection s susceptibility to a single point failure  For example        u Having connected LAN2 and LAN3 to separate hubs  the admin bonds the two ports into  a single Ethernet connection       u LAN2 handles all NTP exchanges  active   while LAN3 remains inactive  backup       The device connected to LAN2 goes off line and LAN2 becomes inactive  backup     a LAN3 becomes active  handling all NTP exchanges for the Ethernet connection    a After fixing the problem  the admin logs in to the SyncServer and restores the redundant  Ethernet ports     Requirements        u The IP address of the virtual Ethernet port must be valid on the network s  to which it is  connected       u The devices to which LAN2 and LAN3 are connected must be able to handle the switch   over correctly  Typically hubs and non managed switches do just fine  while some    Page 164 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using Redundant Ethernet Ports    managed smart switches may need to be configured     Configuring Redundant Ethernet Ports    1   2     DURO    Connect LAN2 and LAN3 to the network     On the NETWORK   Ethernet page  click the EDI
65.  or cable system must be properly  grounded to provide some protection against built up static charges and voltage  Section  810 of the National Electrical Code  ANSI NFPA 70  In Canada  part 1 of the Canadian  Electrical Code  provides information regarding proper grounding of the mast and sup   porting structure  grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit  size of  grounding conductors  location of antenna discharge unit  connection to grounding elec   trodes  and requirements for the grounding electrode    m Keep Antenna Clear of High Voltage Power Lines or Circuits  Locate an outside antenna sys   tem well away from power lines and electric light or power circuits so it will never touch  these power sources should it ever fail  When installing an antenna  absolutely never  touch power lines  circuits  or other power sources  as this could be fatal     AVERTISSEMENT      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 121    Specifications    a Evitez et les dangers de s  ret     lectriques et RF  tels que les lignes    haute tension et les  antennes de transmission de radio de haute   nergie       u O   les dangers potentiels existent  ayez un technicien qualifi   ex  cute l installation    a Observez des codes et des r  glements locaux    a Utilisez un  arrestor  d   clair quand n  cessaire       u Les antennes qui n ont pas   t  s   valu  s pour un courant de 12 VDC peuvent   tre endom   mag  es quand ils sont connect  s au SyncServer      Jonction Sure d Antenne et de C  ble 
66.  or greater than  4   Status should be Locked   4      With GPS locked  the SYNC LED on the front panel should be green within approximately  15 minutes     This can also be accomplished in the web interface using the STATUS   GPS page     Verify synchronization over a 24 hour period to ensure that the GPS antemna installation  meets requirements  This can be accomplished by       Observing the SYNC LED or STATUS   GPS page      Configuring alarm notification  email  SNMP  to receive notification of the Timing GPS  Source Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarm page      Using FIND on the LOGS   messages page to search for  Timing GPS Source Alarm        If the GPS installation does not meet requirements    a Review the GPS topics in this user guide      Troubleshoot for issues with the GPS antenna and cable      Contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v    GPS Cable Configurations Options    GPS satellites signals operate in the L1 band  1575 42 MHz   GPS receivers require a mini   mum signal level of  162 0 dBW  Practically speaking the antenna must have an    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 135    Tasks    unobstructed view of the sky and thus be mounted on a roof  or in some cases in a window   GPS provides almost continuous operation day and night  and under poor weather con   ditions     Since the GPS signal is very weak  the antenna amplifies the signal to drive it through the  cable to the receiver  Antenna cable however offers some resistance and the GPS signal  strength will a
67.  or right     In Depth    Before entering holdover     Page 50 997 01520 02 Rev  C    TIMING   Sysplex    The Hardware Clock is synchronized to one of the Input References and reports Stratum  0 to the NTP daemon    The NTP daemon is synchronized to the Hardware Clock  reference clock  and reports  Stratum 1 to the network     The Hardware Clock enters holdover when the Input Reference becomes unavailable and  no other Input References are available     While in holdover     The Hardware Clock uses the internal oscillator to keep time  flywheeling     The NTP daemon  Stratum 1  remains synchronized to the Hardware Clock  Stratum 0   Reference   the name of the last Input Reference     The SyncServer estimates the time error  difference  between the oscillator based Hard   ware Clock time and UTC    If two or more synchronizing NTP associations are available and the Hardware Clock  accumulates too much time error  the NTP daemon  drops  the Hardware Clock and syn   chronizes with the best association  with a corresponding adjustment to its Stratum     The Hardware Clock leaves holdover when one of the following occurs     An Input Reference becomes available again   As a result  the NTP daemon returns to  Stratum 1 operation    The estimated time error exceeds the user configurable Time Error Limit     If the estimated time error exceeds the user configurable Time Error Limit     The Hardware Clock reports to the NTP daemon that it is unsynchronized  Stratum 16    If one or mo
68.  outside facility  Failure to observe this warning may result in  equipment damage    T1 or E1 mode is selectable via a web page interface on the SyncServer  The input and  the output selection is combined  mixed modes are not supported     When the SyncServer is in T1 mode  the input to the SyncServer may be a 1 544 Mb s  T1 signal or a 1 544 MHz signal 5 1 5Vpp  The T1 receiver circuit provides clock recovery  that the SyncServer may use for system oscillator disciplining    When the SyncServer is in E1 mode  the input to the SyncServer may be a 2 048 Mb s  E1 signal or a 2 048 MHz signal 5 1 5Vpp  The E1 receiver circuit provides clock recovery  that the SyncServer may use for system oscillator disciplining    For the SyncServer to maintain lock to the T1 or E1 signal  the accuracy of the input must  be better than the pull range of the system oscillator     Typical system oscillator pull ranges     TCXO 1E 6  1 ppm   OCXO 5E 7  0 5 ppm   Rubidium 1E 9  1 ppb     T1 E1 Output  Option     The T1 E1 option requires either the OC XO or Rubidium oscillator option to be installed  in the SyncServer to meet G 811 MTIE specifications    T1 or E1 mode is selectable via a web page interface on the SyncServer  The input and  the output selections are combined  mixed modes are not supported     When the SyncServer is in T1 mode  the telecom signal T1  1 544 Mb s  has ESF fram   ing and B8ZS line coding enabled  The transmit load impedance is fixed at 100 ohms and  the cable length se
69.  page  select Regenerate SSH Secure Keys and click the  APPLY button to generate a new set of SSH secure keys  This step is required before the  user can log in to LAN 1 using SSH     Protocol  Sets the protocol to SSH 1  amp  SSH 2  SSH 1 Only  or SSH 2 Only   Allowed Users  List user names that are allowed SSH access   Denied Users  List user names to exclude from SSH access     Note  Use a space character between user names  This list supports the   wild card as a sub   stitute for an individual character  and the     wild card as a substitute for the rest of a word     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 83    Web Interface    For example  Allowed Users   Bird    would let Bird1 and Birddog log in  Allowed Users    Bird  would let Bird1 log in  but not Birddog     Log Level  The level of verbosity level for logging ssh messages  Can be set to QUIET   FATAL  ERROR  INFO  VERBOSE  or DEBUG     Server Key Bits  The number of bits to use when generating the keys  Can be set to 512  768   1024  or 2048     Key Regeneration  The interval  in seconds  with which to regenerate keys     SERVICES   Email    SMTP Gateway and Alarm Email Recipients    This page establishes the SMTP gateway and email addresses used by the SyncServer for  email notification of alarms and password recovery emails  This page must be configured cor   rectly for  Send Email  notification on the ADMIN   Alarms page to work     SMTP Gateway  Enter the DNS name or IP address of a SMTP server that s reachable  from LAN1 
70.  restarts     See also NETWORK   SNMP  on page 23  and NETWORK   SNMP Traps  on page 24      WIZARDS   Backup    The Backup wizard guides the operator through saving the SyncServer s current con   figuration to nonvolatile memory in the SyncServer  and optionally transfers the backup con   figuration to a remote location  The backup file can be used to        Clone  the configuration to other SyncServers with the same Software Version   a Restore the SyncServer s configuration if it is lost or becomes unusable     WIZARDS   Restore    Use the WIZARDS   Restore page to restore a saved configuration from a backup file  or to  restore the factory default configuration     Reset to Factory Defaults  Returns the SyncServer to its original factory configuration  remov   ing ALL user entered and operational information including password  IP addressing  GPS  position  and time zone  See SYSTEM   Factory Reset  on page 64      Restore Last Backup from SyncServer  Restores the configuration as it was when the user  created the most recent backup configuration file  The backup file is located in the Sync   Server s nonvolatile memory     Restore From USB flash drive  Restores the configuration from a backup file located on a USB  drive attached either ofthe USB ports on the front panel     Restore backup from workstation hard drive or network directory  Restores the configuration  from any backup file located on local or network drive accessible to the browser     Page 86 997 01520 02 
71.  seconds  East  Altitude  0 Meters   Antenna Cable Delay  0    REFERENCES   IRIG B  Timecode Input  B 1344 AM  Timecode Output  B 1344 AM  Output Type  UTC   Cable Delay  0    REFERENCES   Modem   Dial Configuration  Tone Dial  ATDT   Preconfigured Phone Numbers  None   Dial Up Time Reference Phone Number s   None    REFERENCES   LF Radio  Installed Radio Option  WWVB  60 kHz     REFERENCES   T1 E1  Output   Configuration  T1  Output   Test Mode  Force AIS   Not checked    SYSTEM   General    997 01520 02 Rev  C    Page 67    Web Interface    Hostname  SyncServer  Check for software Upgrades  Checked    ADMIN   Web   For Login Page Configuration    Appearance Graphic  login page with configurable system information   Title  Null   Time  Hostname  LED s  Checked   NTP Status  Checked   Hardware Clock Status  Checked   GPS Receiver Status and Satellite Count  Checked   Highest Severity Alarm  Checked   Version Info  Uptime  Checked   IP Addresses for all configured LAN ports  Checked   For Configuration Settings    Warn when Navigating without saving changes  Checked   Update the configuration backup file when configuration changes are applied  Checked  Send Browser hint to not Auto Complete Passwords  Not checked    ADMIN   Users  Username  admin  Password  symmetricom    See also  Properties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     ADMIN   Alarms  Under the ADMIN   Alarms topic  see Factory Default Settings for Alarms  on page 77      ADMIN   Logs Config   auth log  Notice
72.  seconds or    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 187    Glossary    other corrections which are periodically added to UTC  GPS time was set to match Coor   dinated Universal Time  UTC  in 1980  but has since diverged           The GPS navigation message includes the difference between GPS time and UTC  which  as of 2006 is 14 seconds  Receivers subtract this offset from GPS time to calculate UTC and     local    time  New GPS units may not show the correct UTC time until after receiving the GPS   UTC Offset message  The GPS UTC offset field can accommodate 255 leap seconds  eight  bits  which  at the current rate of change of the Earth s rotation  is sufficient to last until the  year 2330     As opposed to the year  month  and day format of the Julian calendar  the GPS date is  expressed as a week number and a day of week number  The week number is transmitted  as a ten bit field in the C A and P Y  navigation messages  and so it becomes zero again  every 1 024 weeks  19 6 years   GPS week zero started at 00 00 00 UTC       on January 6   1980 and the week number became Zero again for the first time at 23 59 47 UTC on August  21  1999        To determine the current Gregorian date  a GPS receiver must be provided  with the approximate date  to within 3 584 days  to correctly translate the GPS date signal   To address this concern the modernized GPS navigation messages use a 13 bit field  which  only repeats every 8 192 weeks  157 years   and will not return to zero until near the yea
73.  system status     The Login page includes the following elements     m Username  Enter the username here   Factory default   admin     m Password  Enter the corresponding password here   Factory default   symmetricom     m Secure  Opens an encrypted web session  HTTPS  port 443   For this feature to be avail   able  the user must enable it by using the SERVICES   HTTP page      Recover Password  Prompts the user to answer a password recovery question  If the user  answers correctly  the Sync Server resets the password to a random string and emails it  to the user s email address  For this feature to be available  the user must enable it using  the ADMIN   Users or WIZARDS   1st Setup pages     Use the ADMIN   Web  on page 69  page to configure the status information on the Login page     Also see Logging in to the Web Interface  on page 139  and Recovering a Password   on page 155      Properties of UserNames and Passwords    Usernames  Quantity  amp  Length    There is an upper limit of 32 individual users  each username has a maximum of 32 char   acters in length     Character set  Charset   Each username is limited to the following printable ASCII characters       Upper case letters  A Z   a Lower case letters  a z   a Numbers  0 9      Period         Dash          u Underscoref     a Plus        Usernames may NOT contain any of the following       Standard ASCII keyboard characters not described above  i e        1 amp            Na Me5       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 11 
74.  than that of  the software on the SyncServer  the SyncServer displays a notice on the STATUS   General  page  and generates a System Upgrade Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms page     In order for the Software Update Availability Check to function  LAN1 must have     a Firewall access to the Internet  port 80   a A valid DNS server    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 63    Web Interface    To manually check if an upgrade is available  or if network conditions prevent Software  Update Availability Check from checking automatically  compare http      update symmetricom com upgradeS300 txt with the STATUS   General page     For example  compare  Version  1 10  and  Last Checkpoint  1 103  on upgradeS300 txt  with  Release Version 1 10 Build 1 103  on the STATUS   General page  Since the values are  the same  no upgrade is available     Note  The default configuration of the System Upgrade Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms page is   Severity   Minor    Send SNMP trap    Write to log   and  Send email notification  when  upgrades become available  SNMP and alarm email must be configured correctly to func   tion     The user can also contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v  for infor   mation about upgrades     SYSTEM   Upgrade    Use this page to upgrade the SyncServer s software  This can be done using the web inter   face to upload the new software from workstation  or using the keypad display interface to  upload the new software from a USB flash memory device connected to one of the S
75.  that the user connect the chassis grounding screw to a reliable  earth ground     AVERTISSEMENT   Symmetricom recommande que le chassis soit reli   a une terre fiable     WARNING  VDC Power  For the 48 VDC model of the SyncServer        u Use a disconnect device  such as a switch  with the appropriate voltage current rating  when connecting a VDC Power source      Only use the unit in an restricted area    a The screw torque on the Power Terminal Block is 4 5 to 5 3 inch pounds    m The unit chassis must be grounded for proper safety     AVERTISSEMENT    Sur le 48 VDC mod  le du SyncServer     a Utilisez un dispositif de d  branchement  tel qu un commutateur  avec le classement de  tension courant appropri   en connectant une source de pouvoir de DC       u Employez seulement l unit   dans un secteur avec l acc  s limit      a Le couple de vis sur le TB de puissance est livres de 4 5    5 3 pouces    a Le ch  ssis d unit   doit   tre fondu pour la s  ret   appropri  e    WARNING  GPS Antenna    a Avoid electrocution and RF safety hazards such as power lines and high energy radio  transmission antennas    a Where potential hazards exist  have a qualified technician perform the installation      Observe local codes and regulations    a Use a lightning arrestor when needed    a Antennas not rated for 12 VDC may be damaged when connected to the SyncServer   The GPS antenna supplied with the SyncServer is rated for 12 VDC      Safe Antenna and Cable Connection  An outside antenna
76.  the char   acteristics of the network path  with values typically in the 1   10 millisecond range     Disp  Dispersion represents the maximum error of the SyncServer relative to the NTP asso   ciation  There are two components in dispersion  those determined by the peer relative to the  primary reference source of standard time and those measured by the SyncServer relative   to the peer  They provide not only precision measurements of offset and delay  but also defin   itive maximum error bounds  so that the SyncServer can determine not only the time  but the  quality of the time as well     RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   Config    Use this page to create  edit  or delete NTP associations     Also see Configuring NTP for more information     Current NTP Associations    To edit or delete an association  select it using the checkbox and then click the EDIT or  DELETE button below  If the user selects EDIT  the details for that association are displayed  under Add Edit NTP Association for the user to edit  Use the SAVE button to save the  changes and the RESTART button to make any changes take effect     The list of Current NTP Associations always includes the Hardware Clock  which        u Cannot be
77.  timescale in  different domains is independent     The configurable range is 0     255  e Default is 0    Mean Announce Message Transmit Interval    This is the Announce Interval specified in IEEE 1588 2008 and is specified as the mean time  interval between successive Announce messages     Selections available   e 1sec  e 2sec   4 sec   8 sec   16 sec   32 sec   64 sec    e Defaultis 2 seconds    Announce Receipt Timeout Multiplier    The value of Announce ReceiptTimeout is an integral multiple of the announcelnterval  see  section 7 7 3 1 of IEEE 1588 2008      Page 44 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP   Slaves    e The configurable range is 2 to 10  22 to 210      e Defaultis 3    Return to IEEE 1588 2008 Annex J Recommended Default Settings check box    If you are not sure what selections to make  click on this button to get the standard settings   Any slave should support theses settings as these settings meet the specification     IEEE 1588 2008 Annex J Recommended Default Settings    ransport Protocol  Sync Interval  Delay Mechanism    2E Delay Interval  P2P Delay Interval    riority 2    1 pkt 1 sec    E2E  1    1 pkt 1 sec  1 pkt 1 sec    128  128    Domain Number  Mean Announce Message Transmit Interval  Announce Receipt Timeout Multiplier       PTP   Slaves    This page will show all the slaves associated with this SyncServer  both active and inactive  within the last 14 days  It shows when each slave was last accessed  The range of access  recording is from within 10 mi
78.  to attach the antenna to a vent pipe or mast affixed to the roof  The pipe must be rigid  and able to withstand high winds without flexing        A typical roof antenna mounting     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 131    Tasks    GPS Receivers can be susceptible to reflected GPS signals called multipath signals  Mul   tipath interference is caused by reflected signals that arrive at the antenna out of phase with  the direct signal  This interference is most pronounced at low elevation angles from 10 to 20  degrees above the horizon  The height of the mast antenna may be extended upward to  lessen multipath interference  The antenna should also be at least three to six feet  1 2 m   from a reflecting surface     Use the criteria below to select a good outdoor site for the GPS antenna   The best locations provide     a Unobstructed views of the sky and horizon   a Low electro magnetic interference  EMI  and radio frequency interference  RFI    away  from high power lines  transmitting antennas  and powerful electrical equipment       Convenient access for installation and maintenance       u Reasonable access for the antenna cable to reach the SyncServer        Safety from hazards to people and equipment   Avoid    u Overhanging foliage     Blocked views     Strong EMI RFI interference   a Multipath interference  caused by adjacent structures that reflect GPS signals   Mounting structures        u GPS antenna masts  vent pipes  or railings are usually satisfactory    a Radio towers m
79.  to each other  Use  peer associations instead      Optional  If the SyncServer is located outside the United States  the user can also add at  least one server association that points to a local NTP server  This provides a shorter net   work path  which improves timing precision and accuracy  Often  public NTP servers are  operated by national timekeeping authorities  telecommunications companies  and uni   versities  To find a local NTP server  search the Internet for  Public NTP servers   Include  the name of your country at the end of the search string  When available  select NTP servers  that are stratum 1 over those that are stratum 2     To add a server association   1  Goto NTP   Config in the web interface     2  Under Add Edit Association  for Role  select Server   3  For Address  enter an IP address  recommended  or domain name   4       Optional  Configure the other settings under Add Edit Association  For more infor   mation  see NTP   Config  on page 30      5  Click SAVE   6  Click RESTART     After restarting  the NTP daemon sends regular requests to the server and uses the replies  to compare the NTP server with other servers and peers  The NTP daemon selects the best  server or peer and synchronizes with it     Also see Configuring NTP Clients  on page 148      Using the Other Input References     Optional  Connect any additional Input References to the back panel and configure them  if  needed       For IRIG In  see REFERENCES   Timecode  on page 58      1P
80.  under the direction of technical support personnel  An example may be a signal han   dler called     Info  This level captures informational output  This level typically provides information regard   ing successful operations  An example may be a successful file save or a normal application  startup     Notice  This level captures transactional information  An example of this could be a network  connection or login     Warning  This level captures information that is not expected by the application or system   This could be something the system is not configured to handle  An example might be a mal   formed network packet or a drive change caused by inserting a thumb drive into a USB slot     Err  deprecated   The use of this level is deprecated     Crit  This level captures critical information  This data can often be used to debug the failure  of a system or application under abnormal conditions  An example of this may be a memory  error     Alert  This level captures information about which the administrator should be made aware   An example of this could be a failed login attempt     Emerg  This level captures messages of the highest priority  These are typically last resort  messages before an abnormal exit of the calling application or the system itself  An example  of this would be a hardware error or memory exhausted message     Remote Log System    Itis possible to send a copy of all messages to a remote system running syslogd  This allows  centralized management of
81.  unreachable     For example  the SyncServer is          stratum 1 when the Hardware Clock  stratum 0  is synchronized to an input reference  in  holdover mode  or in freerun mode   a stratum 2 through 15 when it is synchronized to a remote NTP server   a stratum 16 when it is unsynchronized  indicating that it is searching for a valid source of  timing information   The settings on the NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect stratum behavior     Poll Exponent    This is an eight bit signed integer representing the maximum interval between successive  messages  in seconds  to the nearest power of 2  The values can range from 4  indicating a  poll interval of 16 seconds  to 17  indicating a poll interval of 131 072 seconds   36 4 hours      Precision    This is an eight bit signed integer representing the precision of the system clock  in seconds   to the nearest power of 2  For instance  a value of   18 corresponds to a precision of about  one us  The precision is normally measured by NTP at startup and is defined as the minimum  of several iterations of the time to read the system clock     Root Delay    This is a 32 bit unsigned fixed point number indicating the total roundtrip delay to the ref   erence clock  in seconds  with the radix point between bits 15 and 16  This value is always  positive     Root Dispersion    This is a 32 bit unsigned fixed point number indicating the maximum error relative to the ref   erence clock  in seconds  with the radix point between bits 15 a
82.  up the current configuration  if they intend to use it again in the future     To reset the factory defaults  select Reset to Factory Defaults and click the APPLY but   ton  This clears    ALL    of the current settings on the SyncServer  restores the original factory  default configuration  and reboots the SyncServer     After restarting  the user may need to configure LAN 1 before reconnecting to the web inter   face  The default username and password  admin  symmetricom    A partial list of the defaults restored by this operation   a Network port settings    NTP Associations  a Hostname    All settings defined on the ADMIN pages  Web  Users  Alarms  Logs Config   including  the username and password settings   a All services are reset to their default modes of operation      u Hardware Clock settings  including forced mode  Time Zone  Position and Time Error  Limit  IRIG Input and Output  etc     All cryptographic materials  NTP keys  sshd keys  SNMP users and communities   deleted     Logs are erased   Also see Backing Up Restoring Configurations  on page 156   Configuring LAN1  on  page 138   and Logging in to the Web Interface  on page 139      Factory Default Settings    NETWORK   Ethernet   For LAN1    Connection Mode  Static   IP Version  IPv4   IP Address  192 168 0 100  Mask255 255 255 0  Gateway  192 168 0 100  Redundant  000 000 000 000  Allowed Access  Null  Speed Duplex  Auto   For LANGBE  LAN2  LAN3   Connection Mode  Disabled  IP Version  None   IP Address  
83.  with TNC connector  part  110 6210     Please contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v  if any items are missing  or damaged     Connecting and Finding a Signal    Choosing a Site     LF signals can penetrate structures and are often available indoors  particularly at night  when LF signal strength and range are highest       To avoid the cost and effort of running a cable through the building  the user should test  signal quality at indoor sites close to the SyncServer    a Ifthe structure limits LF signal quality and or longer signal availability is important  the  user should test signal quality nearer to the exterior of the building  or outdoors    a Place the LFR outside RF shielded structures and away from strong RF emitters    a Avoid mounting the antenna on or near metallic objects     Applying Power  Use battery power to test signal quality easily over a variety of locations     1  Connect a 9 volt battery  not supplied  to the battery holder TNC cable   2  Connect the battery holder TNC cable to the LFR     Use power from the SyncServer to test signal strength nearby while graphing signal strength  over several days     1  Connect the supplied 50 foot  15 24 m  RG 59 cable to the TNC connector on the LFR   2  Connect the RG 59 cable to the Radio connector on the rear panel of the SyncServer     Signal Quality  The Signal Quality LED  located on the underside of the LFR  indicates       Once per second on off  Good position  strong signal    Irregularlinte
84.  y   Y  row Frequency Radio  WWE  JY  DCF  opina     y   Y  O IATA    S E E E  O CL E EE ER  ri Ba np NE TY E   TU  RIGABIEIGINASASBKR22187 pus AMADIS  SE EE Y  reia        Y   Lime Interval Measurement  amp  Chasing S3S0PTP Opo         Y  Reference pony  usercomfgure        Y       The S250i model uses a timecode input instead of GPS as its primary Input Reference        Page 6 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Comparison by Model    Network Enterprise ANAL TSE    Protocols Feature 0  SES AA ENE  UU  renetwaisabern   AA AY   SNMP VI  V2o  VawihCustomMB  y   Y   Y   Y    UU  DHOP wasablecan  AA        SHCP  widisablefon  Y        Y y   DO ETICO LY UY TV EZ  SN IV UYY   Y  UU INIP va autokey  Server and Client      Y    y   UU  RADIUS Authenticated login     Y    y     1000Base T equipped port  Gigab   _     Y     Y    UU ffotalnumberof   themnetpors  3  4  5   4     SyncServer Model Comparison DER   Advanced  User Interface Class Timing    RL E RAR AR    CX  MU Vacuum ores dsplayimuttine  y  y TY TY  DN VIT ty Ty Ty  CU ESTA 1 PY TY TY  CO BU YA YI Y iy  C Racos      f  o ames       LL O 1   Cd 2      Enterprise   Advanced  SyncServer Model Comparison        CCR ER A RE  RSR AR A RAR A       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 7    Product Overview    NN Enterprise Oni  Timing   S Model Comparison  Outputs       md a AH  TT O v TY TY TY   Co peso SAV VY  C foe SSE i KE  MN Resmo OoOO A Sid    TY  HU  RIGABIEIGINASASEXR22137 onus pas      Y    TE pat optional iv    SyncServer Model Comparison DoS  
85. 0 delay requests per second      NTP vs PTP Capacity  PTP is a higher priority than NTP     PTP delay request messages second NTP Requests second    3000 2000  4000 1100    u The PTP daemon can process up to 6000 delay reqests per second  However   any amount over 4000 results in Web UI being unresponsive        Page 38 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP and NTP Performance    a Ifthe PTP Slave NIC rate is1000BASE T  this will result a delay of 3 micro   seconds at the slave  It is important to note that the LAN2 port only works as  100BASE TX  a slave that operates at a 1000BASE T will have an issue  this  can be resolved by reducing the slaves connection speed to 100BASE TX  See  the user manual for your slave device to determine how this can be done     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 39    Web Interface    PTP Management Messages    Management Message Name Actions Supported  CLOCK DESCRIPTION supported       Fi                         a  El  HI                      a  E   3       supported  COMMAND support    T NON VOLAT COMMAND support    FAULT LOG NOT SUPPORTED    NOT SUPPORTED  ET supported                                                                                                          Q             El  Hd    REN    au upported  ENT D       E   3    upported                E   H                upported             GY  Gd  aj a    E   H       upported       upported          Pl  Fl  ya             upported          upported       Jj  Fij Hi  H H       upported       HI       u
86. 010 a a000 a1 aaaa 122211 155   Recovering a Passvvord 155   Halting the SyncServer                                                                     156  CAUTION  Stopping the SynCSETVET  156   Backing Up Restoring Configurations                                              156  Creating a Backup File    157  Restoring from a Backup File    157  Transferring Configurations    158  Restoring the Factory Default Configuration                                     2 158   Removing the Top Cover    000000000 00000000000000 a aooo aaa aaao 22 21an 159   Replacing the Battery  160    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 125    Tasks    CAUTION  Lithium Battery     200 2000  0 0 00 e cece cece cece cece eee ec eee ceeeeceeeceeeeees 160  Using LF Radio    aaaaaa aaan 0000000000000000 000a aaa a000 aaaea a00 addaa a o ouaaa 160  io a E e 160  Unpacking        2 20 00   2 0c cece eee ec c cece cece cece eee eeeeeceeceececceeeecceeceeeceeeeseeeeees 161  Connecting and Finding a Signal            000000000000000000 0000000000000 000000 00000011100 162  Configuring the SyncServer                                           22 163  Troubleshooting Antenna Locations  163  Mounting Outdoors             2  aaa 164  Additional Resources                  e eee ec cece cece eeeeeeceececeeceeceeeceeees 164  Symmetricom Worldwide Sales    164  Using Redundant Ethernet Ports                                                        164  About Redundant Ethernet Ports    164  Configuring Redundant Ethernet Ports   
87. 1588 2008 PTP option has been activated   See  How to Activate the PTP Option  on page 41    From this page  the status of a list of PTP system parameters of the PTP Daemon can be  Viewed     See  PTP   Master  on page 41    PTP Daemon Status    Clock ID 00 a0 69 ff fe 01 6e 8d  PTP Slaves Tacka PO  Clock Accuracy  2T  Within 100ns     The choices for the Transport Protocol are     e  Pv4 UDP     this is Default    802 3       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 19    Web Interface    Priority   Priority 2  Domain Number oS       STATUS   Alarms    Current Major or Minor Alarms  Alarms with Severity set to        u Major are displayed in red text     Minor are displayed in orange text     Notify are not displayed     Alarms can be configured using the ADMIN   Alarms page   For each listing    Time  The local date and time at which the alarm was raised   Severity  The severity of the alarm event  Major Minor      Name  The name of the alarm  from the list of alarms on the ADMIN   Alarms page     NETWORK   Ethernet    Use this page to get status and configure Ethernet LAN port network settings  including DNS  servers    Ethernet Port Configuration   Edit the network port configuration and view network port status    EDIT  Clicking this button opens a dialog box for configuring the network port     Pending Changes  A check mark indicates that settings have changed  reminding the user  to clickthe APPLY button     Port  The name of the network port   IP Address  The port s MAC  IPv4  and or
88. 3  Upgrade Software  Applies the software upgrade file on  the USB drive to the SyncServer      Notes   Using 1  LAN1  1  Config clears all other network port settings   The factory default password for the keypad is  123      Many keypad functions timeout after approximately 10 seconds of inactivity  no user inputs      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 93    Keypad Display Interface    When performing the USB upgrade  the interface looks for the first valid SyncServer soft   ware upgrade  tar file  If found  it extracts the version information and asks the user for con     firmation before upgrading the software     Page 94 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Command Line Interface    The Command Line Interface  CLI  is available on LAN1 and the Console RS 232 port     The user can connect to LAN 1 using SSH or TELNET  By default  SSH is on and TELNET  is off  Use the SERVICES   Startup web page to change these settings     The username and login are the same as for the web interface     Note  Physical access to the console port on the SyncServer should be controlled  The inter   active bootloader could allow a malicious user to override boot parameters and gain  restricted access to the device  If more information is required  contact Symmetricom Cus   tomer Assistance  on page v      The CLI command structure has two levels  a top level command set of system commands  and an intrinsic help command set  Commands are entered as ASCII strings typed at the  command prompt  The specific commands av
89. 5   Network Protocols  115   NTP epre userre nad rede cese 116   CE WEEE RoHS Conformance    aaa oaaao anaana eee cece cece cece ceceeceeeeeeeeees 116   Safety Standards                                                                  2 117   EMC Standards                                                                     2 118   VCCI Compliance Information    118   Listing of Memory Devices    cece cece ccc ec cece ec ceceecceceeeeeees 118   PRGA 2c neo a E 119   Maintainability  0 0 c cece eee c aaraa oaa aaraa aaan 120   Web Interface                                                   rrrannreerrernnnn 120   SONWANE rr ae a eras eats sd a E ds aioe e 120   Failure Detection and Reporting                                                    120   Warnings and Cautions    0   000000000 000000000 0000000000000 aaao o aaraa a111 121    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 99    Specifications    WARNING  Grounding          2  2 0 20 22 2 eee cece e cece cece ccc ec ccc ceececceeceeceeceeceeeeeee 121  WARNING  VDC POWE  2002 121  WARNING  GPS Antenna  00 121  WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude 00000000000 aa aoaaa aoaaa aoaaa aoaaa oaaao aaaa aa 122  WARNING  Removing Povver  122  CAUTION  VAC Porver   122  CAUTION  DHCP Not Available iii    123  CAUTION  Stopping the SyncServer                                   123  CAUTION  Lithium Battery  0 occ cece eee cece cece eee ecceceeeceeeeeeeees 123    Front Panel       The following elements are located on the front panel  from left to right    
90. Also see WIZARDS   1st Setup  on page 85      Configuring the Network Ports  Configure the remaining network ports using NETWORK   Ethernet     Symmetricom Recommends     m Using static IP addresses   See explanation below      Using Allowed Access to protect the network ports from unauthorized IP addresses or  address ranges     Explanation  NTP associations and authentication may rely on static network addresses  If a  DHCP server assigns a new address to a network port that has DHCP enabled  the asso   ciations and authentication may stop working     Also see NETWORK   Ethernet  on page 20      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 139    Tasks    Adding Server Associations    NTP server and peer associations provide an important backup source of time if the Sync   Server s Input References are unavailable  Having two or more server or peer associations  is important for reliability and redundancy     Symmetricom recommends keeping the three server associations included in the factory  default configuration  These point to NTP servers on the Internet operated by Symmetricom   located in USA      Optional  The user can add associations for NTP servers that reside on the company net   work       For NTP servers that the user cannot configure  add server associations  as described  below      For NTP servers that the user can configure  add peer associations as described in Add   ing Peer Associations  on page 145      Note  Avoid creating server associations on two NTP servers that point
91. CES   T1 El  REFERENCES   Timecode  Reliability   Removing the Top Cover  Replacing the Battery   RESTART button   Restoring from a Backup File  Restoring Redundant Ethernet Ports  Restoring the Factory Default Configuration    S    Safety Standards  Selecting a Site for the Antenna  SERVICES   Email  SERVICES   HTTP  SERVICES   SSH  SERVICES   Startup  Setting the Time Manually  Shock and Vibration  SNMP MIB   Software   Specifications    Page 200    141   112  165  193  80  102  112   5  14  11  68  71  141  156  166  41   46   47   45  40 41  37    1  126    127   102   102   11  155   57  92   62  141   59  102   63  141   48  58  107 108  140  119   159 160   160   28  30  33 37  62  157 158   165   71  141  155  157 158    117  131  84  82  83  81  49  58  167  171  113  172  120  1  99    997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS   Alarms   STATUS   General   STATUS   GPS   STATUS   Network   STATUS   NTP   STATUS   PTP   STATUS   Timing   STATUS Button   Status LEDs   Stratum   Symmetricom Customer Assistance  Symmetricom Worldwide Sales  Synchronizing NTP association  Sysplex Out   SYSTEM   Factory Reset  SYSTEM   General   SYSTEM   Upgrade       T1 El   Tasks   Telecommunications  Modem  Interfaces  TIME Button   Time Interval   TIMING   Holdover   TIMING   HW Clock   TIMING   Sysplex   TIMING   Time Zone   Timing Holdover   Transferring Configurations  Troubleshooting   Troubleshooting Antenna Locations    npacking   pgrading System Software   SB Ports   sing Autokey   sing GP
92. DAONG AY NAIG Do oe dro aut iii   Limited Product Warranty    iii   Limitation of Liability   00 000 00000000000000000000000000000a00 000000 ron a0o2r22r22221 iii   Contact Information    iv  Symmetricom Customer Assistance                                                  V   Table of Contents  aa vii  Quick Start Guide    1  Configuring the SYnNTSET VET  000a 0a a000 000000000000 aooaa oaa 2 aoao 22222222 1  Status LEDS ae 1 3  Halting the SyncServer  ns 3  Product ONE RIG is Parak boa a ADB NG E a PENE NA UNA 5  Comparison by Model    000000000000 aana aooaa 0a aoao 0o00 aoaaa aoaaa aroan 6  AA 9  AA e a II AA 11  Properties of User Names and Passvvords  2eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 11   STATUS   General 12    STATUS TIMIN B I skan baga kan note veu LANG KAG NG L4AJALY one ka e ka italia 14  STATUS GPS Dones tt a eeu ar dales 14  WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude 16    NTP Daemon Status  000000000000000 000000000000 0000000 0na aaan n onanan 16  STATUS   PIP ieia kere KAEO E Eae e 19   PTP Daemon Status    19  STATUS Ad MS i nse dies 20  NETWORK   Ethernet    20  NETWORK   SNMP     22220000 c cece cece cece cece eee cece ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23  NETWORK   SNMP Traps  2 2  24  NETWORK   Ping      0 0    2    ieeecccceeecceeccecceeeeeeeee 25  NTP   SY SIN  aaa 25   NTP Daemon Status  0   000000000 00000000000000 0000000000000 oaoa aooaa rnn nnan 25  NTP   AS 0  eine 28  NTP   Config    aa 30  NTP  MD5 KEYS i o a Ona Ada Ga DA 33    vil    NN e aaa e e E a a ea e e E SAS 34 
93. DENTIFIER      version 6   ntpSysLeap OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX INTEGER     noWarning 0     addSecond 1     subtractSecond 2     alarm 3     ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    NTP Leap Indicator  This is a two bit code  warning of an impending leap second to be inserted  into the NTP timescale  The bits are set before  23 59 on the day of insertion and reset after 00 00  on the following day  This causes the number of  seconds  rollover interval  in the day of insertion  to be increased or decreased by one  In the case  of primary servers the bits are set by operator  intervention  while in the case of secondary servers  the bits are set by the protocol  The two bits    bit O and bit 1  respectively  are coded as follows     00 nowarning   01 last minute has 61 seconds   10 last minute has 59 seconds   11 alarm condition clock not synchronized     In all except the alarm condition 11   NTP itself   does nothing with these bits  except pass them on to  the time conversion routines that are not part of   NTP  The alarm condition occurs when  for whatever  reason  the local clock is not synchronized  such   as when first coming up or after an extended period  when no primary reference source is available     Hz  ntpSystem 1     ntpSysStratum OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXInteger32  0  255   MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Current NTP stratum level  This is an integer    Page 174 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    indicating the stratum of the local c
94. Decimal encoding of hours  minutes  seconds  and days of year   hh mm ss ddd      CF  Control Function  elements   various uses depending on the implementation       DC  TTL Levels   a DCLS  Direct Current Level Shift  width coded    m Hz  Hertz   m kHz  Kilohertz   m Legacy TrueTime  Standard IRIG B with four time quality bits and a lock indicator encoded  in the control bits   m SBS  Straight Binary Second encoding of seconds in the day   m YR  Year    REFERENCES   Modem    Use the REFERENCES   Modem page to create an NTP server association for the modem on  the NTP   Config page  The modem association operates as a backup reference  getting the  time from an automated dial up time service if more accurate NTP associations aren t avail   able  e g   if the hardware clock or other server associations became unreachable   While  the SyncServer s NTP daemon is synchronized to the modem association  system peer      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 59    Web Interface    modem   the Sync LED on the front panel is green and the SyncServer operates as a stratum  1 NTP server     The REFERENCES   Modem page provides the telephone numbers of several established time  services  The user can edit or replace these with the number of any compatible dial up time  service  same protocols  time code  and time scale   Symmetricom recommends that users  outside the United States  Japan  and Germany determine whether a local timekeeping  authority offers a compatible dial up time service     After t
95. IP address  if DNS is not available       Optional  Select the Send Test Email checkbox   Click the APPLY button     Creating a New User    1     cn  e ee PO    Set User to New User    Enter a New username    Enter a New Password and Retype New Password    Optional  Configure password recovery for the new user   Click the APPLY button     See also  Properties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Page 166 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Estimating Worst Case Time Error when GPS is Unavailable    Deleting a Current User    1  For User  select the username to delete   2  Select the checkbox for Delete Selected User   3  Click the APPLY button     Estimating Worst Case Time Error when GPS is Unavailable    Use these instructions to estimate the worst case time error for periods of time while GPS  becomes unavailable  These instructions only apply if     a The SyncServer has no other sources of time such as Hardware Clock Input References  or synchronizing NTP associations    a The GPS antenna is in a location where it experiences periodic outages  Timing GPS  Source Alarms      Depending on obstructions and the latitude of the mounted antenna  there may be periods  throughout the day where no satellite signals can reach the antenna  During these outages   the system runs on its internal oscillator until satellites come back into view and the GPS  receiver provides valid time again     To estimate the worst case accuracy  run the following script from the command line inter   face f
96. IPv6 link local address for LAN 1  Action only  command     HTTP  lt onloff gt   Without input  the command returns the current status of the SyncServer http  daemon  running or stopped   Use input    on    or    off    to start or stop the SyncServer http dae   mon  Query and action command     SETTIMEOFYEAR  lt time gt   Sets the current time in UTC  The  lt time gt  input format can be any  one of the following    mm dd yyyy hh mm ss x  yyyy ddd hh mm ss x  mm dd yyyy hh mm ss x  hh mm ss x    Enter the command without any input  it displays the allowable input time format  Action only  command     ADJUSTTIMEOFYEAR  lt seconds gt   Adjust the current time by a user determined number of sec   onds  The input can be a positive or a negative integer  If the input is negative  the time is  adjusted backward  Action only command     INTRINSIC HELP  Traverse to the intrinsic command tree     Intrinsic Help Commands    Page 96 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Intrinsic help commands are commands that can be used in any tree level as a basic shell  command tool  Below is the list of available intrinsic commands     pop  Moves the command shell to the previous level  When issued from the main shell direc   tory  i e   the root  this disconnects the session     root  Moves the command shell to point to the main shell directory  This is a convenience com   mand for navigating the command shell  The command    root pop  lt Enter gt     disconnects the  session     exit  Exits the Telnet client 
97. IRIG A B E G NASA36 XR3 2137 AM or DCLS  1PPS   10MHz  Sysplex  m Stratum 2 Operation via NTP Servers     u RADIUS  NTPv4 Autokey  MD5 Authentication     Secure Web Based Management  a SSH  SSL  SCP  SNMP  Custom MIB  HTTPS  Telnet  and More     u IPv6 and IPv4 Compatible  a Nanosecond Time Accuracy to UTC     u Alarm Relays  a Rubidium 8 OCXO Oscillator Upgrades     u Upgrade to Radio Broadcast Time Sync    Optional T1 E1 Input Output  m IEEE 1588 PTP Grandmaster Option  a Time Interval Measurement Option    Key Benefits  a Synchronize Hundreds of Thousands of Client  Server  amp  Workstation Clocks  a Very Reliable and Secure Source of Time for Your Network    Multiple NTP Ports for Easy Network Configuration and Adaptation  u Extremely Accurate Time Source for Network Synchronization     u Enhanced Network  amp  Security Features    User Prioritized Reference Selection between  GPS  Timecode  1PPS and 10MHz    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 5    Product Overview    a Access Multiple Time Sources for Reliable and Secure Time  a Intuitive Web Interface for Easy Control  amp  Maintenance    Comparison by Model    fami  Psat KA  UU NP rcadcastSeveroiet O Y P  Iy  C Mereen Y  Y  UU NP Micest Seven Y   Iv  LEE 1688 PTP Grandmaster pions     Iy  NTP time Dayime O LV Iv   U INIP performance  requesisTeecond   2200 Jroooj 3200  7000    Time   Enterprise  Advanced  Ran SyncServer Model Comparison     inputs   pg aa a ae KE na  RE CEA E E  Peeing Ivi  UU Dafipinena modem ACTS IV TUR TRE   
98. Input signal and configuration are both valid   Otherwise it reports  unlocked      Configure the Timecode Input setting to match the input signal on the IRIG In connector         Ifthe Timecode Input is marked  without YR   and there are no other Input References or  synchronizing NTP associations  the default NTP servers on NTP   Assoc page   verify  that the time SyncServer includes the correct year  If needed  manually set the year  See  in Setting the Time Manually  on page 167      Note  IRIGB 1344 provides a Leap Indicator warning during the minute preceding a leap sec   ond insertion deletion  If a leap second adjustment occurs while the SyncServer is syn   chronized to IRIG B 1344    NTP clients that don t poll the SyncServer during this one   minute warning period may be off by approximately one second until they synchronize to the  new time  If the Maximum Poll Interval of the NTP clients is sufficiently shorter than one min   ute  e g   16 or 32 seconds   this scenario is less likely to occur        The  SyncServer is locked to IRIG B 1344  when Hardware Clock locked to the 1344 time   code input and the Hardware Clock is the  synchronizing  NTP association for the NTP dae   mon     Timecode Output  Use the Timecode Output to configure the signal type on the IRIG Out connector     The Cable Delay and Output Type settings only apply to the Timecode Output     Cable Delay  nS   Compensates for delays caused by the length of the cable on the IRIG Out  connector  Use 
99. NTP servers that the user cannot configure  add server associations  as described  below     Page 144 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using NTP    u For NTP servers that the user can configure  add peer associations as described in Add   ing Peer Associations  on page 145      Note  Avoid creating server associations on two NTP servers that point to each other  Use  peer associations instead      Optional  If the SyncServer is located outside the United States  the user can also add at  least one server association that points to a local NTP server  This provides a shorter net   work path  which improves timing precision and accuracy  Often  public NTP servers are  operated by national timekeeping authorities  telecommunications companies  and uni   versities  To find a local NTP server  search the Internet for  Public NTP servers   Include  the name of your country at the end of the search string  When available  select NTP servers  that are stratum 1 over those that are stratum 2     Toadda server association     1  Goto NTP   Config in the web interface    2  Under Add Edit Association  for Role  select Server    3  For Address  enter an IP address  recommended  or domain name    4   Optional  Configure the other settings under Add Edit Association  For more infor   mation  see NTP   Config  on page 30     5  Click SAVE    6  Click RESTART    After restarting  the NTP daemon sends regular requests to the server and uses the replies    to compare the NTP server with other servers an
100. None   Mask  None   Gateway  None   Redundant  None   Allowed Access  None    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 65    Web Interface    Speed Duplex  None  Mgmt Port User DNS Servers  Null    NETWORK   SNMP  sysLocation  unknown  sysName  SyncServer  sysContact  admin localhost  Read Communitysymmpublic  Write Communitysymmprivate  User Name  admin   Mode  rouser   Level  Null    NETWORK   SNMP Traps  Destination  None   Ver  None    Inform   None  User Community  None    NTP   Config   For HW Clock    Checkbox  Grayed   Role  Server   Prefer    IP Address  Hardware Clock   Poll Min  Null   Poll Max  Null   Key  Null   Burst  Null   For 69 25 96 11  69 25 96 12  and 69 25 96 14   Checkbox  Active   Role  Server   Prefer  Null   IP Address  69 25 96 11  69 25 96 12  and 69 25 96 14  Poll Min  Null   Poll Max  Null   Key  Null   Bursti  Burst    NTP   MD5 Keys  Autokey  Autokey Client  All null     NTP   Prefs    Page 66    997 01520 02 Rev  C    SYSTEM   Factory Reset    Leap Indicator Bits StratumFollow Standard NTP rules  Default     TIMING   Timezone  Time Zones  UTC    TIMING   HW Clock   Clock Source Priorities GPS  Timecode  WWVB  1PPS  10MHz  T1E1  Enable  All enabled   Forced Timing Source  Auto   Ignore GPS   UTC Correction  Disabled    TIMING   Holdover    Time Error Limit  1 ms    TIMING   Sysplex   Autostart  No   Parity  Odd   Flywheel Quality Character  X    REFERENCES   GPS   ModeSurvey   Latitude  0 degrees  O minutes  O seconds  North  Longitude  0 degrees  0 minutes  O
101. PS In  10MHz In don t require any configuration     Page 140 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Troubleshooting      For T1 E1 Options  see REFERENCES   T1 E1  on page 63        For LF Radio  see REFERENCES   LF Radio  on page 62  and Using LF Radio  on  page 160      Troubleshooting    The following troubleshooting scenarios provide high level guidance on how to solve a range  of potential problems with the SyncServer     A bullet is a proposed solution  The user should try each solution in turn until the problem  is solved   a A numbered step is a procedure  The user should complete the procedure to solve the  problem     For additional help  contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v      Passwords  You ve tried logging in and the password doesn t work     a Passwords are case sensitive  Check that that Caps Lock isn t on     Use the Recover Password feature  if it is available and configured      u Have another user log in and change your password settings     a Ifall else fails  restore the factory default configuration using the hardware jumper  See  Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  on page 158      See also  Properties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Alarms and Notification  You re not receiving alarm notifications by email or snmp   u Check that the alarm notification settings are enabled  as shown in the Factory Default  Settings for Alarms  on page 77  topic       To receive SNMP traps  verify that the NETWORK   SNMP and NETWORK   SNMP Traps  pag
102. ROHS Conformance cc  116  Safety Standard sim en e e nie Ka 117  EME Standards  2 5 di e EE AEE TA 118  VCCI Compliance Information    118  Listing of Memory Devices      2   aa 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000202 r ar22 22n 118  Rello e De an esar e kan Io 119  Maintainability  2 2 2222    aaa 120  Vvebiinterrac    eur gane a gara ol danois es pr i sapag hi  120  SON Wak e422 ae aao TR paanan dep pla tamu nn A IR saten aah anand 120  Failure Detection and Reporting                                       120  Warnings and Tautions  a   0aa 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000 002a 2a oaoa 2 noL 121  WARNING  Grounding                              eeeceeeceeeee 121  WARNING  VDC Povver   aoaaa anaa a aoaaa LaaLa LALLA LLALLA L ALLAL a aLaaa 121  WARNING  GPS Antenna       22 2    ee eeeereeceoceeecee 121  WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude occ 122  WARNING  Removing Povver   aaao 0aaaaaa aa 00a00 0000000000000000 0000200200222222 122  CAUTION  VAC Power    122  CAUTION  DHCP Not Available                                               2 123  CAUTION  Stopping the SyncServer                                  123  CAUTION  Lithium Battery  2 a   aaa aoaaa oaaao oaaao aaao 0 aaao a ano2 oaa oaa naaa 123  Ta kac Ar es sos eta terete ae RGR A a T recort   ano 125  Installation Guide    126  Uapackin gi    Riel et a ne NE ner a NGA ANAN nba 126   Rack Mounting ics sara dishe nent Lee he kde dv dscuedh Eine done des 127  Grounding the SyncServer                                 
103. Rev  C    WIZARDS   Upgrade    Note  Resetting or restoring the configuration reboots the SyncServer  If LAN 1 is configured  to use DHCP  the DHCP server may assign a new IP address to LAN 1  If needed  use the  front panel STATUS button to view the new IP address on the LAN 1 STATUS screen     WIZARDS   Upgrade    Use WIZARDS   Upgrade to update the SyncServer software     SyncServer upgrade packages are available at http   www    Symmetricom com support ttm swlist aspx  or by visiting http   www    Symmetricom com and following the links for Support  TTM Support  and Software  Downloads    Users are required to register in order to download software  Some export restrictions may  apply    To upgrade the software  download the upgrade package file to       A file area that is accessible to the web browser     To a USB flash drive  or to an area where it can be copied to a USB flash drive     Then use WIZARDS   Upgrade to copy the upgrade file to the SyncServer and perform the  upgrade     Note  The SyncServer automatically decompresses the software upgrade   tar  file  Please  do not decompress the   tar  file prior to upgrading the SyncServer     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 87    This page intentionally left blank    TIME Button    Keypad Display Interface    In this SEC ground  TIME Button    a do do ce 89  STATUS Button    90  MENU Button    oaaao aoaaa Laaa aAA LAAL DLL LADLAD D LLLA LaLa 92    The keypad display interface displays the time  system status  and provides the
104. S   sing LF Radio   sing MD5 Keys on a generic NTP device  sing MD5 Keys on a SyncServer   sing NTP   sing NTP Authentication   sing Redundant Ethernet Ports   sing the 1st Setup Wizard   sing the Modem for Dial up Time Service  sing the Other Input References   TC    accada    4    4    4       Gacaqqcaqqc    997 01520 02 Rev  C    20   12   14   13   16  73  91  116   19   14  75   90   3  75  101  116  141  3  37  50  101  194  v  64  95  118  120  127  135  138  141  162  164   194   51  105   64  86   63  92   64  92  100  142    104   1  125   129   48  89 90   54   14  37  50  53  14  37  48  53  59  90 91  168  49  51  105  48  85  90  115  135   158   141   163    126  161   64  142   100   35  154   1  130  141   62  141  160  151 152   33  147 148  151  144  171  31 32  34  146 148  151  164   139   102  149  140 141   194    Page 201    Index    V  VAC Povver Supply 112  VCCI Compliance Information 118  VDC Povver Supply 111  Verifying Redundancy 165  Verifying Server and Peer Associations 146  Verifying the GPS Installation 135  W   WARNING   GPS Antenna 1  121  130   GPS Position and Altitude 16  122   Grounding 111  121  127   Removing Power 122  159   VDC Power 111  121  129  Warnings and Cautions 1  121  Web Interface 1  9  120  144  WIZARDS   1st Setup 85  139  WIZARDS   Backup 86  100  142  WIZARDS   NTP 86  116  WIZARDS   Restore 86  100  WIZARDS   SNMP 86  WIZARDS   Upgrade 87  100  Working with Generic NTP Devices 147 150    Page 202 997 01520 02 Rev  C 
105. See Creating a Backup File  on page 157      Restoring the default factory configuration removes the current network settings  After   wards  the user may need to configure the LAN1 port in order to use the web interface   Using the Web Interface  Torestore the factory configuration use the one of the following pages    m SYSTEM   Factory Reset    Page 158 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Removing the Top Cover    m WIZARDS   Restore  select Reset to Factory Defaults      To clear site specific information from the SyncServer  disconnect all input network cables  and GPS antenna cables from the rear of the SyncServer shortly after clicking the APPLY but   ton  before the SyncServer has had time to restart     Using the Hardware Jumper  This procedure requires     A jumper   a Size 0 philips head screwdriver    Tweezers or needle nosed pliers for handling the jumper     Note  Observe static protection measures while working inside the SyncServer   To restore the factory configuration     1  Haltthe SyncServer as described in Halting the SyncServer  on page 3     2  VERY IMPORTANT  Remove the top cover as described in Removing the Top Cover  on  page 159     3  Position a jumper  not supplied  across the jumper pins marked JP4  next to the circular  battery    4   Optional  To clear site specific information  disconnect all network and GPS antenna  cables from the rear of the SyncServer and do not reconnect them    5  Connectthe power cable and turn the power switch on  The SyncServer re
106. Sread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Current synchronization source  In stratum  gt  1 this  variable returns the decimal representation ofthe  IPv4 address of its current peer  In stratum   1 this  variable returns the decimal representation of the  hardware clock which is 2981759     Hz  ntpSystem 9     ntpSysPhase OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    System clock offset from the selected source    Hz  ntpSystem 10     ntpSysFreq OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    System clock frequency correction from ntpd    Hz  ntpSystem 11     ntpSysError OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Current system error from ntpd     Hz  ntpSystem 12     ntpSysClock OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Current system time from ntpd  This is usually  derived from the hardware clock but could be  from any other ntp source        ntpSystem 13     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 177    Tasks    ntpSysSystem OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Description of the current system    Hz  ntpSystem 14   ntpSysProcessor OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Type of local processor     Hz  ntpSystem 15    ntpSysNotrust OBJECT TYPE
107. Symmetricom     A PTP option key is required to activate the PTP option in the S300 series SyncServer by fol   lowing this process     1  Log into your SyncServer  See  Logging in to the Web Interface  on page 139    2  Identify your SyncServer serial number on the following web page  SYSTEM  gt   Options  The SyncServer Serial Number is shown on the left  towards the top of this    web page   3  Contact Symmetricom sales at www symmetricom com to purchase a PTP option  key     4  Enter the PTP option key in the Option Key text box of this web page    5  Click the Apply button at the bottom left of the web page to activate the PTP option    6  Once the SyncServer has accepted the Option Key  the PTP Grand Master option will  show up on the right side under  Installed Options     7  Goto NETWORK  gt  Ethernet page and enable LAN2 interface  preferably Static  address      8  Goto the SERVICES    Startup page and make sure the PTP daemon is turned on  and set to auto     9  Goto the PTP 5 Master page and change the settings as desired     PTP   Master    Note  PTP is only supported on LAN  of the 300 Series SyncServer    This page is used to set up parameters associated with the IEEE 1588 2008 PTP Grand   master Configuration     The following is a list of these configuration parameters     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 41    Web Interface    Transport Protocol  Select from     e UDP  e 802 3    Sync Interval    The Sync Interval is used to specify the mean time interval between suc
108. T button for LAN2  This displays the LAN2  Configuration window     For Connection Mode  select Static and complete the IP address related fields   Select the Redundant checkbox   Verify that Active is selected     Click the APPLY button  The LAN2 Configuration window closes  On the NETWORK   Eth   ernet page  observe the status icons for LAN2 and LAN3  which may include pending  changes  check mark   status unknown  question mark   and bonding  letter  B         Click the APPLY button at the bottom of the NETWORK   Ethernet page  The status icons    show LAN  is up and bonded  and LAN3 is bonded     Verifying Redundancy    1     PING  on page 193  the IP Address of the bonded ports  The PING statistics should  show 0  lost  This confirms that the IP address exists on the network     Disconnect LAN3 from the network     PING the IP Address of the bonded ports  The PING statistics should show 0  lost  This  confirms that LAN  is active     Reconnect LAN3 to the network   Disconnect LAN2 from the network  LAN2 becomes backup and LAN3 becomes active     PING the IP Address of the bonded ports  The PING statistics should show 0  lost  This  confirms that LAN3 is active       Reconnect LAN3 to the network and perform the steps in Restoring Redundant Eth     ernet Ports  on page 165      If the PING statistics don t show 0  lost  there is a problem with connectivity to  or con   figuration of  LAN2 and or LAN3     IMPORTANT  After verifying redundancy  perform the steps in Restorin
109. The definition of the variables is provided     u kernel  The NTP daemon is enabled for the precision time kernel support for the ntp_  adjtime   system call      monitor  The NTP daemon is enabled its monitoring facility      ntp  Enables the server to adjust its local clock by means of NTP      stats  The NTP daemon is enabled itsstatistics facility    u auth  The NTP daemon is enabled itsauthentication facility     Page 18 997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS  PTP    jitter  Jitter  also called timing jitter  refers to short term variations in frequency with com   ponents greater than 10 Hz     stability  Stability refers to how well the SyncServer can maintain a constant frequency over  time  It is usually affected by aging  environment changes  etc  The value is expressed units  of parts per million  ppm      broadcastdelay  The broadcast and multicast modes require a special calibration to deter   mine the network delay between the local and remote servers  Typically  this is done auto   matically by the initial protocol exchanges between the client and server  This is the  broadcast or multicast delay reported by the NTP daemon  The value is always set to 0 004  seconds on the SyncServer     authdelay  When NTP authentication is enabled and performed on outgoing NTP packets   this adds a trivial amount of fixed delay that can be removed based on the authdelay value   This value is always set to zero on the SyncServer     STATUS   PTP    This page will only appear if the IEEE 
110. This is a four byte field used to identify the reference clock source  At initial   ization  while the stratum is 16  this field shows the progression of the NTP clock PLL  The  field will start with a value of INIT  may be displayed as 73 78 73 84  the ASCII decimal  values   Once a peer has been selected  the clock may be stepped  in which case the ref   erence ID field will change to STEP  or 83 84 69 80   Once the PLL is locked  the stratum  will be updated and the reference ID will identify the selected peer  In the case of a Sync   Server operating at stratum 1  the reference ID will display the source for the local timing ref   erence  e g   GPS  IRIG  FREE   In the case where the selected peer is another NTP   server  the reference ID will display the IP address of the server or a hash unique to the asso   ciation between the SyncServer and the remote server     reference time  also reference timestamp   The time when the SyncServer last received  an update from the selected peer  Represented using time stamp format in local time  If the  local clock has never been synchronized  the value is zero  A time stamp of zero corresponds  to a local time of Thu  Feb 7 2036 6 28 16 000  This value is typically updated every 16 sec   onds for a locally attached hardware reference  e g   GPS  IRIG  and in an interval of 64   1024 seconds for a readily accessible remote NTP server     system flags  These flags define the configured behavior NTP daemon running on the  SyncServer  
111. X DisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    The time or frequency source currently in use  by the Hardware Clock defined as follows     O None  1 GPS  8 IRIG    16 External 1PPS  24 External 10MHz  31 Freerun       tyming 2     tymingTime OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAX DisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 179    Tasks     The time according to the Hardware Clock in  the format of     WWW MMM dd hh mm ss yyyy    defined as follows     WWW weekday    MMM character month  dd day of month  hh mm ss time   yyyy year    Example Thu Sep 21 23 46 09 2006    Hz  tyming 3     tymingVersion OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX DisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    The version of the software on the SyncServer s  Hardware Clock        tyming 4     tymingFlyPeriod OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX INTEGER   MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    This variable is not currently used and returns Zero    Hz  tyming 5     gpsPosition OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Returns the current position in the format of     A BB CC DD EEE F GGG HH II JJJ KK  defined as follows     A sign of the latitude   1   North   1   South   BB degrees of the latitude  CC minutes of the latitude  DD seconds of the latitude  EEE milliseconds of the latitude    Page 180 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    F si
112. a a  Symmetricom    SyncServer S300  S350    User Guide    Rev  C  October 2010  Part Number  997 01520 02  CD Number  998 01520 02    This page intentionally left blank    Notices    Copyright  Copyright O 2010 Symmetricom  Inc   All rights reserved     Due to continued product development this information may change without notice  If you  find any errors in the documentation  please report them to us in writing  Symmetricom  Inc   does not warrant that this document is error free     Limited Product Warranty    Hardware and embedded software   Depending on the product  for a period of one  or two  years from date of shipment by Symmetricom  Symmetricom warrants that all Products shall  be free from defects in design  material  and workmanship  shall conform to and perform in  accordance with Symmetricom s published specifications  if any  shall be free and clear of  any liens and encumbrances  and shall have good and valid title  This warranty will survive  inspection  acceptance  and payment by Buyer  Symmetricom does not warrant that the  operation of such Products will be uninterrupted or error free  This warranty does not cover  failures caused by acts of God  electrical or environmental conditions  abuse  negligence   accident  loss or damage in transit  or improper site preparation     This warranty shall be null and void in the event  i  Buyer or any third party attempts repair of  the goods without Symmetricom s advance written authorization  or  ii  defects are th
113. a aooaa aaao o 02ra ara 128  Telecommunications  Modem  Interfaces                                                  129  AA 130  Configuring LAN T               2222222 138  Logging in to the Web Interface    139  Using the 1st Setup Wizard          000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000 0000a0 001111 139  Configuring the Network POrts  139  Adding Server Associations  140  Using the Other Input References    140   Troubleshooting                                                                    141  PASSVOT AS    ire dret 0n ete KHA AG kab EREE 141  Alarms and Notification            000000000000000000000 0000000000000001 00 0101ra rannin na n122 2122 141  NER  CIEMS aeea r A E N 141   Upgrading System Software                                                              142  Web Interface    144   Using NTP e ls ee PA nia 144  Adding Server Associations  0 2 cece ccc ec cece ec ceeeecceceeceeceeceeceeeees 144  Adding Peer Associations    145  Verifying Server and Peer Associations                                          146  Adding Broadcast Associations              00000000000000000000000 000000000000 00000001 01011 146  Adding Multicast Associations    147  Configuring NTP Clients           000000000000000000 0000000000 00000000000001 aaa 00001011111101 148  Using the Modem for Dial up Time Service    149  Working with Generic NTP Devices       150  Configuring SYMMT IME    150  Using NTP Authentication  aa 151   Enabling Secure Login    00000000000 000000000000
114. ad Keys  Press the Save As    button to save the Current Keys to your PC as a file     After keys are generated  the user can select Key and a key number in the MD5 key field on  the NTP   Config page     Note  Disregard the  Unable to Open Key File  message while the Current Keys field is  empty     RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   Autokey  Use this page to       Enable autokey authentication   m Generate and download autokey keyfiles and certificates     Create peer  broadcast  and multicast associations that are configured for autokey     Also see Using NTP Authentication  on page 151    Note  MD5 and Autokey cannot be used on the SyncServer concurrently  Configuring one  method erases the keys or certificates of the other     Configuration of SyncServer as Autokey Server    Key Generation Deletion  Identity Scheme  Select the scheme to be used on the SyncServer and the client     PC  Private Certificate    Page 34 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP   Autokey Client    a IFF  Identification Friend or Foe    GQ  Guillow Quisquate    Note  The PC scheme does not have a group key file  The user installs the IFF and GQ  group key file on the Autokey client     Server Password  Enter an alphanumeric string to 
115. ailable atthe particular tree level can be dis   played by entering a          followed by  Enter  on the keyboard      The CLI interface interprets the input on a character by character basis  As a result  only  enough characters to uniquely identify the command need to be entered for the CLI to rec   ognize which command you want to invoke  The CLI also accepts multiple commands on a  single line when they are separated by spaces  so you don t have to press Enter after each  command     Itis suggested that commands marked  Use all caps  be entered in all caps  This helps pre   vent accidental entry of those commands     The following commands are available from the CLI  Refer to the Command Description sec   tion for the syntax of each command     Top level Commands  GPSSTRENGTH   Status only  Displays the GPS satellite tracking information in the following  format   N X1 Y1 Z1     XN YN ZN  Defined as follows       N  Number of satellites  If one or more satellites are available  Xi Yi Zi follows N   a X1  Satellite vehicle number     a Y1  Satellite signal strength in dBW where less than  200 dBW means no signal   u Z1   Z1 can be either T or C     a T racking  means the SyncServer receives the information from the satellite but  the information is not used in its timing solution     a C urrent  means the SyncServer currently uses satellite information in its timing  solution     For example  no satellites   0    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 95    Command Line Interface    Fo
116. al page  enter a unique hostname  This is required to differentiate  the SyncServer from other SyncServers on the network     3  On the SERVICES   HTTP page  select one of the options that includes Secure  port 443    4  Fill out the Certificate Info and click the APPLY button  This restarts the web server    To view the Login page again  you may need to prefix the URL in your browser with https if  you selected the Secure  Port 443  Only option on the SERVICES   HTTP page     To log in securely  select the Secure checkbox on the Login page     Recovering a Password    Enable Recover Password when setting up the SyncServer so it is available when needed   This can be done using the ADMIN   Users or WIZARD 1st Setup pages    To recover a lost or forgotten password     1  Enter the username  select the Recover Password checkbox  and click the LOGIN button     2  Answer the Recovery Question and click the RESET button  The SyncServer sends a mes   sage to the email address of the username     3  When the email arrives  log into the SyncServer using the new password provided in the  email message     4  Change the password using the ADMIN   Users page   If Recover Password wasn t enabled     a Ifthe SyncServer has multiple user accounts  you may be able to have another user log  in and change the password for you     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 155    Tasks      If there is no other way to log into the SyncServer  use the hardware jumper to restore  the factory configuration  See Re
117. ality  In addi     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 137    Tasks    tion  fiber optics provide several other significant network advantages  including simplified  network design  and immunity from EMI RFI and lightning        GPS ANTENNA       SINGLE MODE FIBER E GPS RECEWER    FIBER OPTIC FIBER OPTIC  TRANSMITTER RECEIVER  Fiber optic connections    Lightning Arrestor  In line lightning arrestors are mounted on a low impedance ground  between the antenna and the point where the cable enters the building  They require no addi   tional power or wiring except the ground lead     For more information about any ofthe options described above  please contact Sym   metricom Customer Assistance  on page v      ConfiguringLAN1   During installation  the user configures LAN 1 to gain access to the web interface  After log   ging in to the web interface  the user can configure the remaining ports on the NETWORK   Eth   ernet page     The factory default settings for the LAN1 network port are as follows     IP Address 192 168 0 100     u Mask  255 255 255 0    Gateway  0 0 0 0  Configure new network settings using the keypad on the front panel   1  Press the MENU button on the front panel     2  Using the number buttons  select 1  LAN1  then 1  Config  and configure the port as  needed     3  Check the new LAN1 settings by pressing the STATUS button repeatedly until  LAN 1  STATUS  is shown     Note  Using the keypad display interface to configure LAN 1  erases the previous settings for  all of 
118. and download keys to your workstation    Add or edit an association on the NTP   Conf page    For Role  select Broadcast    For Address  enter 224 0 1 1  or another carefully selected non conflicting address    For MD5 Key  select the appropriate method  Key or Auto   If selecting Key  also select a   key number  1 through 16     Click the SAVE button    7  Click the RESTART button  When the NTP daemon finishes restarting  it broadcasts NTP  messages every 64 seconds     a ee PO    o    Configuring the Multicast Client  To configure an NTP client as a multicast client  consult the manufacturer s documentation     To configure a generic NTP multicast client with MD5 authentication  the user would upload  the ntp keys file to the  etc directory and add the following lines to the ntp conf file  example  values italicized      multicastclient 224 0 1 1  enable auth   keys  etc ntp keys  trustedkey 1    The key number identified by trustedkey must match the key number on the multicast server  association     The SyncServer can also be configured as a multicast client  as follows     1  Configure authentication      For example  use NTP   MD5 to upload the keys file   Add or edit an association on the NTP   Conf page   For Role  select Multicast Client   For MD5  select the appropriate method and Key if needed   Click the SAVE button     Click the RESTART button  When the NTP daemon finishes restarting  it listens for broad   cast messages     oak    ND    Also see       Working wi
119. and tested to withstand the following shock and vibra   tion per Telcordia GR 63 Specifications    Packaged Equipment Shock  Drop  Packaged for shipment  Drop from 29 5 in    Surface  edge  and corner drops   Unpackaged Equipment Shock  Drop  Unpackaged  Drop from 3 9 in    Surface  edge and corner  drops   Office Vibration Environment Locked to 0 1 g   In equipment rack   Transportation Vibration To 1 5 g   Packaged for shipment    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 113    Specifications    Accuracy  amp  Stability   Timing Performance    Synchronization Source  Timing Accuracy to Reference    Mode  known within an or al by the user   known within 1 km or entered by the user   GPS  1 Satellite  position  lt 1 mS to UTC USNO  User must provide a    known within 10 000 km guess at the position  within 10 000 km    15 US relative to 1PPS output   10 US relative to 1PPS output  1100 US relative to 1PPS output   10 US relative to 1PPS output   5 US relative to 1PPS output  NASA 36 AM  10 US relative to 1PPS output    XR3 AM  10 US relative to 1PPS output  2137 AM  10 US relative to 1PPS output    1500 nS relative to 1PPS output  1500 nS relative to 1PPS output   500 nS relative to 1PPS output  1500 nS relative to 1PPS output  NASA 36 1500 nS relative to 1PPS output  XR3 1500 nS relative to 1PPS output  2137 1500 nS relative to 1PPS output    mes gong A  eom  coherent BS    SS ar Client Mode  Local HO ms PA server means on  server same subnet    The stability of the various outputs depends 
120. as follows     a Most Time Zones are sorted by continent and city name        Some Time Zones are sorted by country and city name       u Some Time Zones are sorted by acronym  e g   UTC  EST        u Some islands are sorted by ocean  e g   Atlantic  Pacific  Indian  or national affiliation     Current shows the time zone in effect and the local time at the moment the page was gen   erated     TIMING   HW Clock    Hardware Clock Configuration  Manage the references listed under Clock Source Priorities as follows       Enable or disable the reference using the checkboxes under Enable  Checking the box  enables the reference  clearing it disables the reference    m Change the priority of the reference by highlighting it and then using the Up Down Arrow  buttons move it up or down in priority      Restore the default priority and availability settings by clicking the DEFAULTS button       u Each reference shows its default priority  For example   GPS  Default 1       Page 48 997 01520 02 Rev  C    TIMING   HW Clock    Symmetricom recommends using the default priorities   The Forced Timing Source setting affects all timing outputs and displays       Auto  The SyncServer automatically synchronizes with a Hardware Clock Input Ref   erence   or a synchronizing NTP association      Free Run  The user sets the time on the SyncServer by entering the UTC date and time  under UTC Time  The SyncServer uses its internal oscillator to keep time  This setting over   rides the Hardware Clock 
121. assword      The SyncServer contacts each RADIUS server listed on the ADMIN   RADIUS page until it  receives authentication from a RADIUS server    a If RADIUS authentication fails  the SyncServer attempts to authenticate the user against  its own access control list     The LAN 1 port must have access to     a A valid DNS server if the RADIUS server is identified by its DNS name  hostname      The authenticating RADIUS servers     Radius Configuration   For each server  set the following values    Server DNS NamellP Address  The RADIUS server s hostname or IPv4 IPv6 address   Secret Key  The authentication key shared by the RADIUS server and the SyncServer     Timeout  The number of seconds to wait for authentication from the RADIUS server before  disconnecting and trying the next one     Enable RADIUS Authentication  Makes RADIUS and then standard SyncServer authentication  available     Disable RADIUS Authentication  Makes RADIUS authentication unavailable  Only standard  SyncServer authentication is available     SERVICES   Startup    Daemon Current State and Startup  The SyncServer uses a number services that operate continuously to support its functions   Use this page to     a View the current state of the services and to turn them on or off     Enable or disable services from starting automatically when the SyncServer is started      Run  Reboot  or Halt the SyncServer s operating services and operating system     Daemon    A list of the user controllable daemons supp
122. at periodic intervals thereafter  The server responds by simply interchanging addresses and  ports  filling in the required time information and returning the message to the client  Servers  need retain no state information between client requests  while clients are free to manage  the intervals between sending NTP messages to suit local conditions     In the symmetric modes  the client server distinction  almost  disappears  Symmetric passive  mode is intended for use by time servers operating near the root nodes  lowest stratum  of  the synchronization subnet and with a relatively large number of peers on an intermittent  basis  In this mode the identity of the peer need not be known in advance  since the asso   ciation with its state variables is created only when an NTP message arrives  Furthermore   the state storage can be reused when the peer becomes unreachable or is operating at a  higher stratum level and thus ineligible as a synchronization source     Symmetric active mode is intended for use by time servers operating near the end nodes   highest stratum  of the synchronization subnet  Reliable time service can usually be main   tained with two peers at the next lower stratum level and one peer at the same stratum level   so the rate of ongoing polls is usually not significant  even when connectivity is lost and error  messages are being returned for every poll     leap indicator  LI    The Leap Indicator  LI  is a two bit binary number in the NTP packet header tha
123. ay require the services of a specialist  and may be subject to signal inter   ference      Must be able to withstand very high winds     If a good site is not available  consult Operating in  Window Mode     on page 133      Installing the GPS Antenna    1  Observe all relevant safety precautions and building code regulations  Avoid      Electrocution  RF  lightning  and falling hazards   a RFI and EMI sources such as transmitting antennas   a Crimping or making sharp bends in the cable    2  Mount the standard L1 GPS antenna at the selected site       Position the GPS antenna vertically  with its top pointing toward the sky  and the  PVC mounting mast and connector pointing down     a Secure the PVC mounting mast to the structure using the pipe clamps provided  with the antenna kit     3  Run the antenna cable or cables to the SyncServer  Use a lightning arrestor and ground   ing  as required to meet building and safety codes     4  Connect the antenna cable to the GPS Ant connector on the rear panel     Page 132 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    Note  Symmetricom recommends posting a  Do not paint  notice to prevent the GPS  antenna from being painted accidentally   Tips      The user can access the connector underneath the GPS antenna by removing the four  recessed screws in the lower half of the GPS antenna with a Phillips head screwdriver  It  is a relatively easy task and does not violate the weatherproofing design of the antenna   Typically  users do this to
124. battery out of the holder   Dispose of the battery in accordance with local regulations    Use the new battery to press the latch down while sliding the battery into the holder     Noa       CAUTION  Lithium Battery    The SyncServer contains a Lithium Battery that maintains the system s Real Time Clock   RTC  when the SyncServer s power is off  Replace the Lithium Battery only with the same  or equivalent type  Do not dispose of the Lithium Battery in a fire or incinerator  or the battery  may explode  Follow disposal regulations in your area for Lithium Battery disposal     ATTENTION   Le SyncServer contient une batterie de lithium pour maintenir l horloge en  temps reel pendent que le courant est debranch    Remplacez la batterie de lithium seule   ment avec une batterie de type   quivalent  Ne vous d  barrassez pas de la batterie de lithium  dans un feu ou un incin  rateur  car la batterie pourrait exploser  D  barrassez vous de la bat   terie usag  e de lithium selon les instructions du fabricant     Using LF Radio  Introduction    The Low Frequency Radio  LFR  option gets time from a radio time service and makes it  available as an Input Reference  The LF radio option can be used alone  or as a backup to  other Input References  such as GPS and Timecode  Depending on conditions  the LF radio  option may be able to operate indoors     Please note that the LFR option provides the least accurate timing reference to the Sync   Server s hardware clock  in the milliseconds ra
125. c   Server  creates a backup file  and then uses the backup file to transfer the configuration  tothe remaining SyncServers    a The user needs a  known good configuration  in case the SyncServer s configuration is  inadvertently changed or lost     The SyncServer s backup and restore features are available from two locations     Page 156 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Backing Up Restoring Configurations        From the web interface  using the WIZARDS   Backup and the WIZARDS   Restore pages     From the front panel keypad  using the MENU button and the 4  USB menu item     The backup restore features can use a variety of media     a A USB flash drive plugged into either of the USB ports on the front panel   a Any directory that is accessible to a browser     Notes       Not all USB flash drives are compatible with the SyncServer s USB ports  Symmetricom  recommends using SanDisk cruzer micro USB devices       The backup file includes the configuration of the NETWORK   Ethernet page  If restoring a sin   gle configuration to multiple units  if the network ports have static IP addresses  avoid IP  address conflicts by changing these addresses       Transferring configurations between a SyncServers with different hardware or software  might not work  The user may want to back up the configuration of the  destination  Sync   Server before applying the configuration of the  originating  SyncServer  One can also  restore the Factory Defaults if the transfer doesn t work  See the Restorin
126. c Time  TAI   with leap seconds    Page 194 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Operational Configuration    announced at irregular intervals to compensate for the earth s slowing rotation and other dis   crepancies  Leap seconds allow UTC to closely track Universal Time  UT   a time standard  based not on the uniform passage of seconds  but on Earth s angular rotation      Operational Configuration    A common configuration of the SyncServer needed for operation under a range of typical  conditions  This is a concept rather than a specific configuration     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 195    This page intentionally left blank    Index    10MHz In  10MHz Out  1PPS In  1PPS Out    About Redundant Ethernet Ports   Accuracy  amp  Stability   Timing Performance  Adding Broadcast Associations   Adding Multicast Associations    Adding Peer Associations  Adding Server Associations  Additional Resources  ADMIN   Alarms  ADMIN   Logs Config  ADMIN   RADIUS  ADMIN   Relays  ADMIN   Users  ADMIN   Web   Alarm Descriptions  Alarms and Notification    Backing Up Restoring Configurations    CAUTION    CE WEEE ROHS Conformance    DHCP Not Available  Lithium Battery    Stopping the SyncServer    VAC Power    Changing the Password  Chassis Grounding Screw  Command Line  Command Line Interface  Comparison by Model  Configuring LAN1  Configuring NTP Clients    Configuring Redundant Ethernet Ports    Configuring SNMP  Configuring SymmTime    997 01520 02 Rev  C    106  106  106  107    164   114   146 147   147
127. cation do not work and the web interface is not available     Note  The Network LED indicates the status of the  LAN  Link Alarms   Please consult  Status LEDs  on page 3      LAN  Link Alarm  LAN2 has lost its network connection   LAN3 Link Alarm  LAN3 has lost its network connection   LANG Link Alarm  LANGbE has lost its network connection     Timing NTP Daemon Alarm  The NTP Daemon is no longer a valid source of timing to the Hard   ware Clock     Timing sLF Radio  Source Alarm  The LF Radio module cannot be decoded by the Hardware  Clock  The values for  lt LF Radio  can be WWVB  DCF77  and JJY     Timing T1E1 Source Alarm  The T1 E1 Input is no longer a valid source of timing to the Hard   ware Clock     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 75    Web Interface    System RADIUS Server Alarm  This alarm is raised when the system failed to create firewall  rules to allow RADIUS packets  Without the proper firewall rules  RADIUS server s  cannot  provide authentication service     System Reset Default Config Alarm  Typically  during a reboot  the SyncServer applies the cur   rent configuration  This alarm is raised when the system failed to initialize itself to the current  configuration and it automatically restored itself to the default configuration  The cir   cumstances are usually caused by missing or corrupted current configuration     PTP Leap 59  Leap second deletion is pending  The last minute of the day will have 59 sec   onds     PTP Leap 61  Leap second insertion is pending 
128. cessive Sync mes   sages  the syncinterval  when transmitted as multicast messages     The configurable range is 26 to 2 6  2 8 to 26  is 1 second 64 packets to 64 pack   ets second      Default is 20  which is 1 packet second  Select from      e 64pkt 1 sec  32 pkt 1 sec  16 pkt 1 sec  8 pkt 1 sec  4 pkt 1 sec  2 pkt 1 sec  1 pkt 1 sec  1 pkt 2 sec  1 pkt 4 sec  1 pkt 8 sec  1 pkt 16 sec  1 pkt 32 sec  1 pkt 64 sec    Note  The IEEE 1588 2008 requires the delay request setting to be   or less than the sync  interval  Bear this in mind as this Web Ul does not enforce this     Delay Mechanism  The choices for the Delay Mechanism are     e E2E  End to End   e P2P  Peer to Peer     Packet TTL   Time to live   TTL   In this text box you can set the number of router hops up to 256 hops     The TTL range is 1 to 256  if you enter 0 or    256 a message stating that the value of TTL is  out of range will appear     Page 42 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP   Master    Note  1588 multicast packets typically operate at a TTL of 1  changing this value may affect  the quality of your network timing     E2E Delay Interval    The end to end E2E Delay Interval controls the number of request packets from the slaves  connected to this unit  See  Sync Interval  on page 42    When the E2E selection is made at the Delay Mechanism  see above   the following selec   tions are available     e 64pkt 1 sec  e 32 pkt 1 sec  e 16 pkt 1 sec  e 8pkt 1 sec  e 4pkt 1 sec  e 2pkt 1 sec  e 1 pkt 1 sec  e 1pkt 2 sec
129. cted  broken  shorted  or too long     Timing Timecode Source Alarm  The Hardware Clock is not detecting a valid input signal on the  IRIG In connector     Timing PPS Source Alarm  The Hardware Clock is not detecting a valid input signal on the  1PPS In connector     Timing 10MHz Source Alarm  The Hardware Clock is not detecting a valid input signal on the  10MHZ In connector     Timing GPS Antenna Short Alarm   Displayed on GPS equipped SyncServers only  The GPS  receiver detects an overcurrent condition on the GPS antenna cable  The likely cause is a  short circuit     Timing GPS Antenna Open Alarm   Displayed on GPS equipped SyncServers only  The GPS  receiver detects too little current in the power supplied to the GPS antenna  The likely cause  is a disconnected or broken GPS antenna cable  A GPS splitter may also cause this con   dition    Timing Oscillator DAC Range Alarm  The SyncServer is applying the maximum or minimum  DAC value to steer the oscillator  If this recurs frequently or over a sustained period of time   there may be a problem with the oscillator     Page 74 997 01520 02 Rev  C    ADMIN   Alarms    Timing Rubidium Lock Alarm  The optional Rubidium oscillator  if installed  has not stabilized its  frequency output  After power up  this alarm may be raised for up to several minutes until the  Rubidium warms up and stabilizes its frequency output     Timing Oscillator Unlock Alarm  The Hardware Clock s oscillator frequency is not locked to the  reference sou
130. d Display                                            101   REA PANNES STE O O O O ne AN AA ke 102  Radio  LF Radio Module   0000 0 000a00aaaaaaa aoaaa oaaao aaao aa aoaaa anaon 2 aana 102  AAA ETAN EAA T E AAE ET 102  Power and Alarm Relays  102  Network POMS si EE ae NSAN 103  AA AA AA AN ABA O E 104  SYSPIEX O N a ne i aa pa A is LUPA a Cuban 105   TOM AZ O ova naaa LAN dore etes le KAB AA bib 106  TOMBAZ DUES Kaka pb BA e paaa NAG AG APR an ls esta ac banas 106   AO PA BASA  AA NA ea eos E 106   TP PS O Utes tn ts id nd LAT An la ecco so dia aa O PAGAN een 107   IRIG In  Timecode In     cece cece cece cece cccccecececcccceeeeetceeees 107   IRIG Out  Timecode DUt   oaas E A EAN 108   IRIG Control Function Bits  2 109  GPS  REG IVEh 2  2 gar sen cree sia AGAM sine msn 110  Chassis Grounding Screw          2   Rana anen e ene enen 111  WARNING  Groundin ge 111  VDC Power Supply    111  WARNING  VDC Povver   ooa aaa naana aaan a aooaa aaah 0o Aaaa ADDL LLALA DDL anaana 111  VAC Power SUPPTY  112  CAUTION  VAC Povver   aoaaa aoaaa anaoa aoaaa aaao aoaaa ALLL L AAAA LLDD LLA o Laana na 112  NA AE E T   112  Physical Ses E cn EEEE A a 112  Environmental 113    Shock and Vibration    113  Accuracy 8 Stability   Timing Performance    114  GPS ANTENNA nna had Ain NANA AA KA AT nae el al en a Sa NJ dh al 115  Timing Holdover ai iii e e bn 115  Network Protocols              22    222 c cece ccc cc cece aLa LALALALA LALALALA LALLA ALAL aLaaa 115  INT Piste acto ett AA AA 116  CE WEEE 
131. d Display Interface    Leap Indicator   Limitation of Liability   Limited Product Warranty  Listing of Memory Devices  Logging in to the Web Interface  Login   LOGS    Maintainability  Managing Users  MENU Button  Modem   Mounting Outdoors    NETWORK   Ethernet  NETWORK   Ping  NETWORK   SNMP  NETWORK   SNMP Traps  Network Ports  Network Protocols  Notices   NTP   NTP   Assoc   NTP   Autokey   NTP   Autokey Client  NTP   Config   NTP   MDS Keys  NTP   Prefs   NTP   Sysinfo   NTP Associations  NTP Clients   NTP Daemon   NTP Daemon Status  NTP Packet          Operating in  Operational Configuration    997 01520 02 Rev  C    58  107  58  108    101  1  89  100 101    14  37  189  111   111   118   11  65  139  11   84    120  71  166  92  138  102  164    20  85  91  139   25   23  86   24  86   103   115   111   116   28  116   34  116   35  116   30  86  116  140  145 147  188  190  33  86  116   17 18  26 27  36  51  116  189  191 192  194  25  116   28  189   141  151   190   16  25  31  37   16  25  190    53  57  132 133  195    Page 199    Index    Passwords   Physical   PING   Power and Alarm Relays   Power Switch   Product Overview   Properties of User Names and Passwords  PTP   Master   PTP   Performance   PTP   Save Restore   PTP   Slaves   PTP Management Messages   PTP Option with Time Interval Test    Quick Start Guide    Rack Mounting   Radio  LF Radio Module    Rear Panel   Recovering a Password  REFERENCES   GPS  REFERENCES   LF Radio  REFERENCES   Modem  REFEREN
132. d can have serious consequences for systems that are synchronized to UTC   This action should only be performed by a person who is knowledgable and authorized to do  so     About distributing GPS Time    Network Time Protocol  NTP  is based on UTC  However  some users distribute GPS time  over NTP to avoid leap second adjustments  This is a non standard practice  and should not  be undertaken without a comprehensive understanding of the effects that it can have on a  timing network     Coordinated Universal Time  UTC  is a discontinuous atomic time scale that is the basis for  civil timekeeping around the world  Leap second adjustments are periodically applied to UTC  so that it remains consistent with Earth s rotational time  which is variable and gradually slow   ing    The Global Positioning System time  GPS time  is a continuous atomic time scale that does  not include leap second adjustments  GPS time was synchronized to UTC at the beginning  of the GPS epoch  on January 6th  1980  The two time scales  tick  at the same rate  but are  different by the number of leap seconds that have been applied to UTC since that date  This  difference is known as the GPS UTC Offset  As of January 1st  2006  the offset from GPS to    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 169    Tasks    UTC was  14 seconds  This difference will continue to change and probably grow as future  leap second adjustments are applied to UTC     To generate UTC  the SyncServer gets the GPS UTC Offset from the GPS navigation
133. d peers  The NTP daemon selects the best  server or peer and synchronizes with it     Also see Configuring NTP Clients  on page 148      Adding Peer Associations    A pair of peer associations lets two NTP servers evaluate each other as part of their clock  selection algorithms  but prevents  timing loops  where both servers lock to each other  This  approach is typically applied to clusters of NTP servers on a LAN or WAN  and provides  excellent synchronization and redundancy     To create a pair of peer associations     1  Onthe SyncServer  go to NTP   Config in the web interface    2  Under Add Edit Association  for Role  select Peer    3  For Address  enter the IP address  recommended  or domain name of the peer    4   Optional  Configure the other settings under Add Edit Association  For more infor   mation  see NTP   Config  on page 30     5  Click SAVE    Click RESTART     7  Log into the other NTP server and repeat the process of creating a peer association that  points to the IP address or domain name of the SyncServer  For example  on a generic  NTP daemon  add the following line to the ntp conf file    peer 192 168 61 54    D    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 145    Tasks    Verifying Server and Peer Associations  After configuring server and peer associations  verify that they are reachable     To verify the factory default configuration  observe the SYNC LED for several minutes after  turning the power on  If the SYNC LED transitions from red to orange  stratum 2   the
134. de and longitude of the GPS antenna in degrees  minutes  and fractional  seconds  Referenced to WGS 84     Altitude  The altitude ofthe antenna in meters  Referenced to WGS 84   Satellites  The list of GPS satellites visible to the receiver     m Sat Number  The GPS satellite s Satellite Vehicle  SV  number  a unique identification  number     Signal  The relative strength of the GPS signal  dBW   decibels relative to 1 Watt     a Status   Current  means that the receiver is using the GPS signal in its timing solution    Tracked  means the receiver is tracking the signal  but isn t using it in the timing solution     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 15    Web Interface    WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude    GPS position and altitude are for timing purposes only  They are not intended for navigation  or other critical applications     AVERTISSEMENT   La position et l altitude de GPS sont seulement pour la syn   chronization  Elles ne sont pas pr  vues pour la navigation ou d autres situations critiques  sit   uations de la vie ou mort      STATUS   NTP  NTP Daemon Status    This page displays the status of the NTP daemon  Many of the fields below are based on the  NTP Packet  on page 190   Also see http   www ntp org     system peer  The IP address of the clock source  The source is selected by the NTP dae   mon that is most likely to provide the best timing information based on  stratum  distance  dis   persion and confidence interval  The system peer identified as  SYMM_TE 0   is 
135. dover Sysplex Time Interval  NETWORK T 1PPS Time Interval Measurement Current Sync Source  None    Last Interval Measurement    Run test for 10 minutes    NTP    PTP    REFERENCES       SYSTEM Samples in Current Measurement    SERVICES Maximum Interval Recorded  ns  Minimum Interval Recorded  ns     LOGS    Mean of Interval Values  ns  Standard Deviation of Values  ns       EEE ST     Median  ns  RMS  ns     As cc NME   Q         Page 54 997 01520 02 Rev  C    TIMING  Time Interval    Please Note  It takes a few moments for the charting applet to open in a separate browser  window on the host computer  After the charting applet is open  you have access to several  options to customize the graph to your liking     Pressing the Graph pull down menu in the upper left of the applet allows you to select  among the following chart types to view the Time Interval Measurement data    e Line   e Scatter   e Column   e Histogram    From the Graph pull down menu  you can also select between a Dynamic or Static view of  your data  If you are currently running a measurement and would like to view the data as it is  being processed  select the Dynamic view     1 Applet HTML Page   Mozilla Firefox    L   http   192  168 47 49 ppsApplet htmi    Data   Graph        Line 1PPS Time Interval Measurement   Scatter   Column  Histogram   HI  Dynamic       10 Static  Sug       o  c     P     o       E         Time  UTC           From the Data pull down menu  you can view data from the     e Last5 mi
136. e  All of the fields must contain values     When a certificate has been created  the Secure log in option appears on the login page  The  entire session uses the selected communication method   Security    Standard  Port 80  Only  The web interface is available using a standard non encrypted http  connection  This is the factory default configuration     Secure  Port 443  and Standard  Port 80   The web interface is available using either type of con   nection     Secure  Port 443  Only  The web interface is available using an SSL encrypted connection     Note  To connect to Port 443  the URL in the browser must begin with  https      Certificate Info     Common Name  SyncServer s hostname  as entered on the SYSTEM   General page  The  default factory configuration is  SyncServer      Bits  Number of RSA Key Bits  1024 or 2056 bits  The default factory configuration is  1024    Days to Expiration  The number of days before the certificate expires    ISO Country Code  The Two Character International Country Code    State  The state where the SyncServer is located    Locality  The locality where the SyncServer is located    Organization  The organization or company the SyncServer belongs to     Organizational Unit  The organizational unit or division that uses or is responsible for the Sync   Server     Email Address  The email address of the administrator responsible for the SyncServer     SERVICES   SSH    SSH Security Configuration    After setting the other options on this
137. e  Redundant  checkbox and apply the changes  If  the bond doesn t release  reboot the SyncServer     Allowed Access  Restricts the LAN port to access by specified IP addresses or address  ranges  If the user leaves this field blank  the LAN port accepts connections from any IP  address  Allowed Access applies to all forms of network traffic  including NTP and HTTP con   nections  Reconfiguring the IP address of the LAN port erases the Allowed Access list     The user can specify address ranges by setting the IP address followed by the mask prefix  length  as described RFC 1518 and RFC 1519 for Classless Interdomain Routing  The   mask prefix length specifies the number of masked bits starting from the left most posi   tion  For example  to allow access from the network represented by 192 168 0 0   255 255 0 0  the user would enter 192 168 0 0 16  In other words  the first 16 bits of the  address  192 168  are masked bits representing the network address The remaining bits are  host address which is set to O     Note  When configuring Allowed Access  take care to avoid blocking DNS  HTTP  NTP   RADIUS  SMTP  SNMP  and SSH traffic     Speed Duplex  Sets the network port speed automatically  Auto   to 10 or 100  Sets the  transmission to Full or Half duplex  User must exercise caution when changing speed and  duplex settings on any of the SyncServer ports  Speed and duplex settings on a network port    Page 22 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NETWORK   SNMP    are negotiated with its net
138. e  SMTP server      a  Send test mail when finished   a  Set Local Time Zone   7  Configure the remaining network ports using NETWORK   Ethernet      Assign static IP addresses   a Protect LAN1 and the other ports from unauthorized IP addresses or address  ranges using the Allowed Access feature   8  Configure the NTP clients on your network with the IP address es  of the SyncServer s  network ports     The SyncServer is providing synchronized time to the network when the SYNC LED  front  panel  is orange or green     Optional Tasks    In the web interface        Connect any other Input References to the rear panel and configure them using the  pages under the REFERENCES section      Use the NTP   Config page to synchronize the SyncServer with any other NTP servers       u Use WIZARDS   SNMP to set up alarm notification by SNMP      Use SERVICES   Email to set up alarm notification by email    a When the SyncServer is completely configured  use WIZARDS   Backup to save a backup  file of the configuration to a safe location  Write the location of the backup file on this  printed document and store it in a location that is easy to find     Page2 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Status LEDs    Status LEDs    The four tricolor LEDs provide the following status information     an Input Reference or the  NTP server  modem   NTP Stratum 2 15  NTP Stratum 1     57000 NTP pack  gt  5000 packets per NTP activity within the last  second        Alarm Major Aam  No Curent Enabled ams    Also see St
139. e GPS receiver surveys continuously to determine its  position and doesn t switch to another mode  This mode   must be initiated by a user  and is appropriate for mobile  applications such as ships  land vehicles  and aircraft    The degree of accuracy this mode offers is fine for NTP   time over networks  but is less than optimal for the IRIG B   1PPS  10MHz outputs available on some SyncServer models     Receiver Mode  Hold     The GPS receiver has completed Survey mode and switched to  this mode  or the user has manually entered a position and  forced it into this mode  The accuracy and stability of the  SyncServer s timing outputs are optimal when the receiver   has its exact position and is in this mode     etcVersion OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAX DisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Version info for SyncServer system       etc 1     etcSerialNbr OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only  STATUScurrent    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 183    Tasks    DESCRIPTION   Unique serial number factory programmed into each unit       etc 2     etcModel OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Model type factory programmed into each unit       etc 3     etcUpgrade OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  1024    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Describes whether or not an upgrade is available from  the upgrade server described as follows     O No 
140. e GPS receiver to complete the GPS acquisition process and  achieve  locked  status  Also see Operating in  Window Mode   on page 133      Also see TIMING   Holdover  on page 50  and TIMING   HW Clock  on page 48      Note  If the user sets Forced Timing Source on the TIMING   HW Clock page to Free Run  the  Flywheel Quality Character in effect at that moment remains in effect thereafter     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 53    Web Interface    TIMING  Time Interval    You can use the Time Interval only if you have purchased the PTP option  See  How to Acti   vate the PTP Option  on page 41    Time Interval is only available on S350 Syncservers with the PTP option enabled     The time interval is measured from the 1PPS in and compared to the top of second of the  internal hardware HW Clock  This means that you cannot use the 1PPS input as a reference  source and measure Time Interval at the same time  The Web UI will not prevent you from  doing this  but the user should disable the 1PPS in on the TIMING  gt  HW Clock page when  making a Time Interval measurement     From the TIMING  Time Interval page  press the CHART button to access the charting  applet          Symmetricom SyncServer  350   Mozilla Firefox    Tools Hep  192  168 47 94 controler  tming php    CU AHE    1 Symmetricom SyncServer 5350 KJ    Symmetricom Syncserver 5350    Projects SyncServer Centurion   ttm    AAA  Symmetricom SyncServer  350    Timing GPS Source Alarm EESO    STATUS  gt    Time Zone   HW Clock   Hol
141. e Server Host Key File and Server Certificate  File at a secure location  For IFF and GQ  use BROWSE to locate the group key file from a  secure location     Enter the Server Password  if needed   Use INSTALL to upload the key and or certificate files to the SyncServer     After uploading the keys  click the RESTART button to make the key s  active on the Sync   Server     Upon making the added keys active  the SyncServer will be able to authenticate NTP pack   ets from NTP servers that use those keys     Newly added NTP Autokeys are not active until the user clicks RESTART   RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   Prefs    The settings on this page determine whether the NTP daemon  once synchronized  can  report an unsynchronized state     Note  Symmetricom recommends keeping the default Standard NTP Rules setting below  The  Override Behavior setting is mostly a  compatibility  setting for custom systems built around  legacy TrueTime GPS clocks such as the NTS 200     Out of the three following stages of operation  the NTP   Prefs settings only apply during the  Loss of All References stage     1  Startup  Upon starting  before synchronizing with any NTP associations  the NTP dae   mon reports to potentia
142. e T1 E1 connector  the SyncServer automatically detects  the signal type  makes it available to the Hardware Clock as an Input Reference  and reports    Status as  locked   If a valid Input Reference is not present  the SyncServer reports Status as   Unlocked      Output    fa TIJE1 input is present  the T1 E1 output  Configuration  must match the input type  If no  T1 E1 input is present  the output can be set to either type  T1 or E1      Note  The output type must be the same as the input     Use Test Mode   Force AIS to force an Alarm Indication Signal  AIS      SYSTEM   General    Use this page to manage     a The network Hostname for the SyncServer   a Automatically check for software upgrades     Hostname   Default   SyncServer   The hostname identifies the SyncServer on the network  and is also an important element of NTP autokey authentication  When operating multiple  SyncServers on a network domain  or when using NTP autokey  replace the hostname with  a unique descriptive string composed of alphanumeric characters with no spaces or special  characters  The field has been programmed to reject invalid characters     Software Update Availability Check   Default  Enabled  When enabled  the SyncServer checks  a file on the Symmetricom web site for software upgrades shortly after noon  local time  Mon   day through Friday  as determined by the Local Time Zone setting on the TIMING   Time Zone  page  If the software Release and Revision on upgradeS300 txt are more recent
143. e available  Four pages associated with the PTP button will ena   ble you to     m Setup PTP configuration parameters See  PTP   Master  on page 41   a Save and restore PTP configuration parameters See  PTP   Save Restore  on  page 47     Monitor slave activity See  PTP   Slaves  on page 45   a Collect measurement data and view PTP performance over the network by run   ning charts  See  PTP   Performance  on page 46    In addition to the pages associated with the PTP button  the following pages will allow further  monitoring and control of the PTP option    a The status of the PTP Daemon can be monitored at STATUS  gt  PTP See   STATUS   PTP  on page 19  a In addition to existing alarms  alarms relevant to PTP are trapped at Admin  gt   Alarms See  ADMIN   Alarms  on page 72  a PTP settings for Daemon current state and startup can be found at Services  gt   Startup See   SERVICES   Startup  on page 81    Time Interval Test    The Time Interval Test feature is provided along with the PTP option in the S350   Details of the Time Interval Test feature can be seen at TIMING  gt  Time Interval  See  TIMING  Time Interval  on page 54    PTP and NTP Performance    The PTP daemon has the highest priority  When the PTP daemon is on it will adversely  affect the number of NTP requests the SyncServer can process     a With PTP turned on  the amount of NTP packets the SyncServer can handle is  reduced to half or greater  depending on amount of PTP traffic    a PTP Message Capacity is 400
144. e longer than the holdover period in days     Please note the Holdover settings on this page also affect NTP if Override Behavior is  selected on the NTP   Prefs page     Also see Stratum  on page 194      The Settings    The user can simply set the number of days Holdover lasts  or specify a Time Error Limit  Set   ting either field generates an equivalent value in the other field     About Time Error  When no Input References are available  the oscillator drifts away from  the correct time  accumulating time error  The type of oscillator affects how quickly time error  grows  The SyncServer keeps an ongoing estimate of the time error  Holdover ends when  the estimated time error is equal to or greater than the user configured Time Error Limit     The Oscillator Type affects the rate at which the oscillator accumulates time error when no  Input References are available       TCXO     The standard temperature compensated oscillator      OCXO  The optional oven compensated oscillator is more stable and offers better hold   over performance than the TCXO      Rubidium   The optional rubidium oscillator has the best stability and holdover per   formance     Several methods are available for the user to adjust Holdover or Time Error Limit        Entering a value for Holdover Limit or Time Error Limit and click the SET button   a Sliding the green vertical bar on the Holdover graph left or right     Sliding the one of the black spheres under Holdover Limit or Time Error Limit left
145. e number of satellites the receiver is using     Antenna  The electrical state of the GPS Antenna   Good  for a normal antenna load current    Open  for an open electrical circuit in the antenna   Short  for an electrical short circuit     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 91    Keypad Display Interface    Note  If you use a GPS antenna splitter  the status can become Open while the GPS receiver  is still able to operate normally     Lat  The latitude of the SyncServer     Mode  The acquisition mode of the receiver  Survey  GPS receiver is determining its posi   tion   Dynamic  a user configured mode for mobile applications  or Hold  the GPS receiver  has determined its precise location  or the user has manually entered the location      Lon  The longitude of the SyncServer   Also see REFERENCES   GPS  on page 57      SyncServer Status Screen   Hardware and software identification  Software upgrade availability   Model  The model number    S N   The serial number    Version  The software  Release Version  number     Upgrade Available  Shows  Yes  ifthe SyncServer detects that more recent version of soft   ware is available at www symmetricom com     Also see SYSTEM   General  on page 63  and SYSTEM   Upgrade  on page 64      MENU Button    Pressing the MENU button presents a tree structured menu of functions   1  LAN1  1  Config  1  IPv4  1  Static Addr  Apply a static IP address   2  DHCP  Automatically get a dynamic IP address     2  IPV6  Automatically configure LAN 1 with an IPv6 
146. e result  of improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer or third party   iii  of damage to said goods  by Buyer or third party supplied software  interfacing or supplies   iv  of improper use  includ   ing termination of non certified third party equipment on Symmetricom s proprietary inter   faces and operation outside of the product s specifications  by Buyer or third party  or  v  the  goods are shipped to any country other than that originally specified in the Buyer s purchase  order     Goods not meeting the foregoing warranty will be repaired or replaced  at Symmetricom s  option  upon return to Symmetricom s factory freight prepaid  provided  however that Buyer  has first obtained a return materials authorization number   RMA Number   from Sym   metricom authorizing such return  The RMA Number shall be placed on the exterior pack   aging of all returns  Symmetricom will pay shipping costs to return repaired or replacement  goods to Buyer     Symmetricom reserves the right to disallow a warranty claim following an inspection of  returned product  When a warranty claim is questioned or disallowed  Symmetricom will con   tact Buyer by telephone or in writing to resolve the problem     Limitation of Liability  The remedies provided herein are the Buyer s sole and exclusive remedies  In no event or cir   cumstances will Symmetricom be liable to Buyer for indirect  special  incidental or    consequential damages  including without limitation  loss of revenues or profits  bu
147. e sky are always preferred regardless of orientation     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 133    Tasks                                  A typical window    mounting with the antenna is shown in the preferred window     Guidelines    For best results with window mode     Position the antenna near the lower windowsill  This improves upward visibility of the sky   If multiple sites are available  choose the one with the widest view of the sky and tilt the  antenna toward the  opening     On the side of a building  the corners offer better visibility  270 degrees  than flat walls   180 degrees     A SyncServer equipped with the high stability Rubidium oscillator option can provide pre   cise time for extended periods while GPS is unavailable    Secure the antenna so it won t fall or get knocked out of position    To improve signal strength  test different window locations  shorten the antenna cable  length  avoid unnecessary connectors  and use an in line amplifier option   Signal  strength is visible on the STATUS   GPS page     Avoid windows with metallic film coatings  window blinds  overhead obstructions  and  foliage  all of which can block GPS signals    Verify that the NTP   Associations page is configured with valid NTP servers or peers that  the SyncServer can rely on if GPS is unavailable     Configuring Window Mode    After setting up the antenna     1     On the TIMING   Holdover page  set the Time Error Limit  milliseconds  to the highest  acceptable value for absolute timin
148. ed to identify the reference clock source  At initial   ization  while the stratum is 16  this field shows the progression of the NTP clock PLL  The  field will start with a value of INIT  may be displayed as 73 78 73 84  the ASCII decimal  values   Once a peer has been selected  the clock may be stepped  in which case the ref   erence ID field will change to STEP  or 83 84 69 80   Once the PLL is locked  the stratum  will be updated and the reference ID will identify the selected peer  In the case of a Sync   Server operating at stratum 1  the reference ID will display the source for the local timing ref   erence  e g   GPS  IRIG  FREE   In the case where the selected peer is another NTP   server  the reference ID will display the IP address of the server or a hash unique to the asso   ciation between the SyncServer and the remote server     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 27    Web Interface    reference time  also reference timestamp   The time when the SyncServer last received  an update from the selected peer  Represented using time stamp format in local time  If the  local clock has never been synchronized  the value is zero  A time stamp of zero corresponds  to a local time of Thu  Feb 7 2036 6 28 16 000  This value is typically updated every 16 sec   onds for a locally attached hardware reference  e g   GPS  IRIG  and in an interval of 64   1024 seconds for a readily accessible remote NTP server     system flags  These flags define the configured behavior NTP daemon running 
149. eference that is outside  the user s administrative jurisdiction  The NTP servers operated by Symmetricom  that are part of the factory default configuration are an example of this       Peer   a Addressing  Use with IPv4 class A  B and C addresses     a Description  Creates a persistent symmetric active association between the Sync   Server  peer1  with an NTP node  peer2   For the NTP node running in sym   metric passive mode  there is nothing needs to be done on the NTP node   However  the NTP node can be configured in symmetric active mode too  When  configured  the two nodes can synchronize with each other in a variety of failure  scenarios  such as loss of GPS and Internet connectivity  See system peer mode   symmetric active under NTP Daemon Status  on page 16     a Typical Usage  The user configures NTP associations on two NTP nodes that  point to the each other  The two nodes are usually of equal stratum and have inde   pendent references  such as two separate GPS installations or two separate net   work paths to NTP servers on the Internet  In the event of a reference failure  the  peers can synchronize to the node that has the best remaining reference    m Broadcast    a Addressing  Use an IPv4 broadcast address of the local subnet  To broadcast  NTP messages on a subnet  if the local interface IP address were 192 168 61 58  and the mask were 255 255 255 0  the broadcast address could be  192 168 61 255    a Description  Creates a broadcast server association  When
150. efs  on page 36  page affect Ll behavior     CC HP No warning  esses warning        01 Leap second insertion  Last minute of the day has 61 seconds   r Leap second deletion  Last minute of the day has 59 seconds     Alarm condition  Not synchronized        When the SyncServer or NTP daemon is started or restarted  the leap indicator is set to  11    the alarm condition  This alarm condition makes it possible for NTP clients to recognize that  an NTP server  the SyncServer  is present  but that it has yet to validate its time from its time  sources  Once the SyncServer finds a valid source of time and sets its clock  it sets the leap  indicator to an appropriate value  The NTP Leap Change Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms  page can be configured to generate an alarm and send notifications each time the leap indi   cator changes state     NTP Associations    An NTP association is a configured relationship between the SyncServer s NTP daemon  and another NTP node  The Role of the association determines the behavior between the  NTP daemon and NTP node  The most common type of association  Role  is Server  which  means the NTP node operates as a server to the SyncServer s NTP daemon     The Hardware Clock  on all models  and the Modem  on the S300 and S350  are NTP  nodes that exist within the SyncServer  All other NTP nodes exist on the network and can  only be reached through the network interfaces on the SyncServer     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 189    Glossary    NTP Daemon    The Ne
151. en C and NC     Network Ports  Description  Three 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports  LANI  LAN2  LAN3   One 10 100 1000 Mbps  Ethernet port  LANGBE   Connector Four standard RJ 45 8 pin connectors  Frame Format for LAN1  LAN2  LAN3     IEEE 802 3  10Base T at 10 Mbps      IEEE 802 3u  Fast Ethernet at 100 Mbps   Frame Format for LANGBE     m IEEE 802 32 and 802 3ab  1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet at 1000 Mbps  for LANGBE  port    Roles   a LAN1     Web interface  HTTP   command line interface  TELNET      u The default port for most NTP functions   a DNS  SMTP  SNMP    All ports respond to NTP  port 123   TIME  port 37   and DAYTIME  port 13  requests   Factory default static IPv4 addresses   a LAN1192 168 0 100  u LAN2192 168 0 101       u LAN3192 168 0 102     u LANGbE192 168 0 103    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 103    Specifications    Note  The SyncServer s network ports require Category 5  or better  network cable     11 E1    T1 E1 Input  Option     The SyncServer s T1 E1 option has transformer coupled I O provided on a rear panel  female DB9 connector    The Optional T1E1 TERMKIT provides two adapters for temporary use connecting to the  DB9 connector  For wire wrap applications  the T1E1 TERMKIT contains a DB9 to wire   wrap adapter  The adapter pins are marked to identify tip  ring  and sleeve  For BNC  applications  the T1E1 TERMKIT contains a DB9 to BNC adapter    Because lightning protection is not provided on the SyncServer s T1 E1 option  do not  connect lines directly to an
152. ent stations     Configuring the SyncServer to send SNMP Traps  To configure SNMP to send SNMP traps     m Specify trap recipients on the NETWORK   Traps page   1  Select SNMP v    v2c  or v3     2   Optional  For v1 and v2c traps  specify a community string that will be  included in the trap PDU     3  For v3 traps  create a v3 user for the destination management console  Spec   ify an 8 character Auth phrase   Optional  Specify a Priv phrase        u On the ADMIN   Alarms page  specify which events generate SNMP traps     SNMP MIB    The following text comes from the SyncServer s Custom MIB  symm smi txt  located on the  Product Information CD    SYMM SMI DEFINITIONS     BEGIN  IMPORTS   OBJECT TYPE   MODULE IDENTITY   OBJECT IDENTITY   FROM RFC 1212   DisplayString   FROM RFC 1213 MIB   TRAP TYPE   FROM RFC 1215   enterprises    Integer32  Unsigned32   FROM RFC1155 SMI     symmetricom MODULE IDENTITY  LAST UPDATED  10130612002   ORGANIZATION  Symmetricom  Inc    CONTACT INFO    Symmetricom  Inc    2300 Orchard Parkway   San Jose  CA 95131    DESCRIPTION    This is the MIB Module for Symmetricom s enterprise specific  parameters      Page 172 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    REVISION  A   DESCRIPTION  jflory   updated NTP  tyming  and etc descriptions   Hz  enterprises 9070     assigned by IANA    symmNetworkManagement OBJECT IDENTITY  STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    This is the root object identifier for all MIBS under the  Symmetricom tree          symmetricom 1 
153. er  159  Removing the Top Cover    159  Replacing the Battery  160  CAUTION  Lithium Battery soosse diepe teier eaea idea 160   Usinge LRRad AA 160  INTRODUCTION AA E 160  UI 161  Connecting and Finding a Signal   0   0000000000000000000000000000000000002002121 162  Configuring the SyncServer                                                           163  Troubleshooting Antenna Locations     0     ccccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeees 163  Mounting Outdoors                                                      164    xi    Additional ResouTTES  164  Symmetricom Worldwide Sales    164  Using Redundant Ethernet Ports  2   0  0000000000000000 0000000000000000 2 02o 22r 2222222 164    About Redundant Ethernet Ports  cece ccc ce ccc ccececcceeccccccccceues 164    Configuring Redundant Ethernet Ports    165  Verifying Redundancy                                  165  Restoring Redundant Ethernet Ports    165    Mahagine USers e os he ne Oe toed ed Sen a a dane AN 166    Changing the Password    166  Enabling Password Recovery    00000000000000 000020 a 202222222222 166  Creating a New User  166  Deleting a  Current User    locos scort 167  Estimating Worst Case Time Error when GPS is Unavailable                                167  Setting the Time Manually    aaa 167  Distributing GPS Time    169  Distributing Non UTC Time    170  Configuring SNMP     oaaao aoaaa aoaaa 0000000000000000 00000 ADLAD D Aaaa aonana 171  SNMP MB  aoaaa aoaaa NAAN 172  LA AA 187  Command Lines  aaa ne el o pea De
154. es are configured correctly       To receive email notification  verify that the SERVICES   Email page is configured correctly   a Verify that LANT is configured with a valid DNS server address     NTP Clients  The NTP clients can t reach or synchronize with the SyncServer  On the SyncServer       The Network LED on the front panel should be green  Otherwise  check the physical net   work port connections  Also see Status LEDs  on page 3         u Check the configuration of the network ports on the NETWORK   Ethernet page  described  in Configuring the Network Ports  on page 139      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 141    Tasks        Ifthe Sync LED on the front panel is red  the SyncServer is unsynchronized and NTP  clients won t synchronize to it  Configure the SyncServer with a valid reference input  and or NTP server peer associations  Also see Using GPS  on page 130   Using the  Other Input References  on page 140   and Adding Server Associations  on page  140      Upgrading System Software    Overview of the Software Upgrade Process    In its factory default configuration  the SyncServer automatically checks for software  upgrades every weekday shortly after noon local time  If an upgrade is available  the Sync   Server generates a System Upgrade Alarm     The user responding to the alarm logs into the web interface  The status bar at the top of the  window may show that an alarm has been triggered  and on the STATUS   General page    Release Version  states that an upgrade is
155. es situations critiques  sit   uations de la vie ou mort      WARNING  Removing Power    Prior to removing the top cover  disconnect all power connections     AVERTISSEMENT   Avant d enlever le couvercle  d  branchez le courant   lectrique      CAUTION  VAC Power    u The VAC Power Supply specification reflects the overall Power Supply ratings  For UL  and CE compliance the Power Supply must only be operated at 100   240 VAC  50 60  Hz     a The SyncServer should only be plugged into a grounded receptacle   ATTENTION      a Les sp  cifications d approvisionnement de courant alternatif ci dessus refl  tent les esti   mations globales d alimentation d   nergie  Pour la conformit   d UL et de CE l al   imentation d   nergie doit   tre seulement op  r  e    100   240 VCA  50 60 hertz    a Relier le SyncServer    une prise de courant avec contact ad  quat de mise    la terre     Page 122 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Warnings and Cautions    CAUTION  DHCP Not Available    If the user selects DHCP  the SyncServer tries to reach a DHCP server for approximately 90  seconds before stopping  Please do not disconnect the power during this time     ATTENTION  Si l utilisateur choisit DHCP  le SyncServer essaye d atteindre un serveur de  DHCP pendant approximativement 90 secondes avant de s arr  ter  Veuillez ne pas enlever  le courrant pendant ce temps     CAUTION  Stopping the SyncServer    Avoid removing power while the SyncServer is operating  Stop the operating system before  removing power
156. exposure to the elements  See the following figure of a typ   ical mast mount application     Page 136 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide           GPS ANTENNA    MOUNTING MAST       INLINE AMPLIFIER      GPS RECEIVER    Typical mast mount of in line amplifier          GPS Down Up converter  The GPS Down Up converter makes cable runs of 250 to 1500 feet   75 mto 457 m  possible  GPS signal down conversion requires a special GPS antenna and  corresponding signal up converter  The antenna module converts the signal down to a lower  frequency that has less attenuation  and transmits it the length of the cable to the up con   verter  The up converter restores the signal to the normal GPS signal frequency for use by  the receiver     GPS ANTENNA DOWN UP CONVERTER       p     GPS RECEIVER  L3    UPCONVERTER       GPS down up con   verter    The down up conversion process is transparent to the GPS receiver  As with any precision  GPS timing receiver  only cable delay and down conversion delays need to be entered into  the receiver  Power is supplied by the GPS receiver or an external power supply  It is impor   tant to note that the cable used in GPS down up conversion is different from the standard  cable     Fiber Optic Links  Fiber optic connections function as a transparent link between the antenna  and GPS receiver equipment  These links eliminate the limitations of copper systems by ena   bling longer transmission distances while retaining the highest level of signal qu
157. ference     STATUS   GPS    GPS Receiver Operation   This page displays the status of the GPS Receiver    Receiver Description   GPS  indicates the presence of a 12 channel GPS receiver   Receiver Status     a Receiver Down  The Hardware Clock can t communicate with the receiver      Unknown Mode  An undefined mode of the GPS receiver    a Acquiring Signal  The receiver is attempting to track a GPS signal       u Bad Geometry  The geometry of the tracked satellites is unsatisfactory for a position solu   tion    u Propagate Mode  A position estimation mode used in highly dynamic environments     Page 14 997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS   GPS    a 2d Solution  The receiver is able to perform position fixes for latitude and longitude but  does not have enough satellites for altitude    a 3d Solution  The receiver is now able to perform position fixes for latitude  longitude and  altitude      Position Hold  Position fixes are no longer attempted  and the surveyed or user entered  position is used       u Time Valid  The receiver has valid timing information from GPS satellites  including GPS   UTC Offset and Leap Indicator   If the GPS receiver and antenna are set up correctly  the  receiver status should eventually reach and remain in this state     Mode     a Survey  The receiver is surveying and averaging its position  When it has finished sur   veying  the receiver switches to Position Hold mode  Survey mode and Position Hold  mode are appropriate for static applications  such
158. formation regarding proper grounding of the mast and sup   porting structure  grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit  size of  grounding conductors  location of antenna discharge unit  connection to grounding elec   trodes  and requirements for the grounding electrode    m Keep Antenna Clear of High Voltage Power Lines or Circuits  Locate an outside antenna sys   tem well away from power lines and electric light or power circuits so it will never touch  these power sources should it ever fail  When installing an antenna  absolutely never  touch power lines  circuits  or other power sources  as this could be fatal     AVERTISSEMENT      a Evitez et les dangers de s  ret     lectriques et RF  tels que les lignes    haute tension et les  antennes de transmission de radio de haute   nergie       u O   les dangers potentiels existent  ayez un technicien qualifi   ex  cute l installation    a Observez des codes et des r  glements locaux     Page 130 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    a Utilisez un  arrestor  d   clair quand n  cessaire       u Les antennes qui n ont pas   t  s   valu  s pour un courant de 12 VDC peuvent   tre endom   magees quand ils sont connectes au SyncServer      Jonction S  re d Antenne et de Cable   Relier ce syst  me d antenne ou de c  ble ext  rieur  avec un contact ad  quat de mise    la terre pour assurer une protection contre l a   ccumulation des charges statiques et du voltage  La section 810 du code   lectrique  national 
159. g Redundant Eth   ernet Ports  on page 165      Note  The NETWORK   Ethernet page and LAN2 Configuration window do not indicate which  port is currently active  The LAN2 Configuration page only shows the initial configuration for  Redundancy     RestoringRedundant Ethemet Ports    1     On the NETWORK   Ethernet page  click the EDIT button for LAN2     2  For Redundant  select Backup   3   4  Click the EDIT button for LAN2     Click the APPLY button and then click the APPLY button on the NETWORK   Ethernet page     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 165    Tasks    5  For Redundant  select Active     6     Click the APPLY button and then click the APPLY button on the NETWORK   Ethernet page     Managing Users    Use the ADMIN   Users page to add  delete  and edit user profiles  including passwords and  password recovery  All users have full administrative privileges     Changing the Password    1   2     3     4     Enter current user s Old Password    Enter the New Password and Retype New Password     Optional  Configure password recovery for the current user as described in Enabling  Password Recovery  on page 166     Click the APPLY button     See also  Properties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Enabling PasswordRecovery    1   2   3     4   5     For new and current users  select the Password Recovery checkbox   Select a Recovery Question and enter the Answer     Enter an Email Address and the SMTP Gateway s DNS name  if LAN 1 can reach a DNS  server on the network  or 
160. g error  to UTC   Symmetricom recommends a value  greater than or equal to 4 milliseconds   On the STATUS   GPS page  if the GPS receiver has a valid position  latitude  longitude  alti   tude   the user can skip to step 3  Otherwise   a Determine the approximate latitude  longitude  and altitude of the GPS antenna   This can be done using a handheld GPS device  an online reference such as    Page 134 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    Google Earth  or by looking up the Latitude and Longitude information provided  on the SyncServer Product Information CD ROM       On the REFERENCES   GPS page  enter the approximate latitude  longitude  and alti   tude     3  Set the Mode to Position Hold and click the APPLY button     Other Considerations    The accuracy of the user entered position affects the timing accuracy of the GPS reference   When GPS status is locked     Position Accuracy Timing Accuracy   lt  50m   lt  164 feet   lt  0 005 ms     lt 7 kn  00 67 mile   10 kn 16 2 miles        During window mode operation  if the GPS receiver is not locked to any satellites and no  other Input References are available  the GPS receiver enters holdover mode and is subject  to oscillator drift  Also see Oscillators  see  Timing Holdover  on page 115      Verifying the GPS Installation   Verify the GPS antemna installation    1  Press the STATUS button on the front panel    2  Press the up arrow button to display the GPS STATUS screen    3  When the number of Satellites is equal
161. g page  and from the  command line on most operating systems  For more information  search the Internet for   PING Man Page      PTP  Precision Time Protocol  The Precision Time Protocol as defined in IEEE Std 1588 2008  IEEE Standard for a Pre   cision    Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems     Stratum    This is an eight bit integer that indicates the position of an NTP node within an NTP timing  hierarchy  It is calculated by adding 1 to the stratum of the NTP system peer     For the SyncServer  the stratum values are defined as follows       O  Hardware Clock when locked     16 255  JUnsynchronized  unreachable        For example  the SyncServer is       stratum 1 when the Hardware Clock  stratum 0  is synchronized to an input reference  in  holdover mode  or in freerun mode    a stratum 2 through 15 when it is synchronized to a remote NTP server    a stratum 16 when it is unsynchronized  indicating that it is searching for a valid source of  timing information     The settings on the NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect stratum behavior     Synchronizing NTP association  Synchronizing NTP associations are associations capable of providing time to the NTP dae     mon  On the SyncServer  these are associations whose Role is server  peer  broad   castclient  and multicastclient     UTC    From Wikipedia   Coordinated Universal Time  UTC  is a high precision atomic time standard   UTC has uniform seconds defined by International Atomi
162. g the Factory  Default Configuration  on page 158  topic     Creating a Backup File    From the front panel keypad   Plug a compatible USB flash drive into either USB port    Wait 10 seconds    Press the MENU button    Select 4  USB    Select 1  Backup Cfg    When the SyncServer finishes  Saving to USB Drive   remove the USB flash drive     DO ISO NS    From the vveb interface    1  On the WIZARDS   Backup web page  click the BACKUP button to create a backup file on  the SyncServer     2  Then use the SAVE AS or COPY button to download the backup file to a your workstation  ora USB device     Restoringfrom a Backup File    From the front panel keypad   1  Plug the USB flash drive into the  target  SyncServer    Wait 10 seconds    Press the MENU button  select 4  USB  and select 1  Restore Cfg    The SyncServer reports  Restoring from USB Drive  and  Shutting down  please wait      When the SyncServer finishes rebooting  remove the USB flash drive     OF a Ga PO    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 157    Tasks    From the web interface  On the WIZARDS   Restore web page  select one of the following options      Reset to Factory Defaults  See Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  on  page 158       Restore last backup from SyncServer     a Restore backup from USB flash drive     Restore backup from a workstation hard drive or network directory     Transferring Configurations    The user can transfer a configuration across multiple SyncServers to save time and effort   provided t
163. gn of the longitude    1   East   1   West   GGG degrees of the longitude  HH minutes of the longitude  Il seconds of the longitude  JJJ milliseconds of the longitude  KK altitude in meters    gpsUTCOffset OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXINTEGER  0  127   MAX ACCESSread only  STATUSCcurrent   DESCRIPTION   This variable is reserved for future use         gps 2     gpsHealth OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    This is the GPS    receiver health status defined as  follows     0   Receiver Down The Hardware Clock can t  communicate with the receiver     1   Unknown Mode An undefined mode of the GPS  receiver     2   Acquiring Signal The receiver is attempting to  track a GPS signal     3   Bad Geometry The geometry of the tracked  satellites is unsatisfactory for  a position solution     4   Propagate Mode A position estimation mode used  in highly dynamic environments     5   2d Solution The receiver is able to perform  position fixes for latitude and  longitude but does not have  enough satellites for altitude     6   3d Solution The receiver is now able to    perform position fixes for  latitude  longitude and altitude     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 181    Tasks    7   Position Hold Position fixes are no longer  attempted  and the user entered  or surveyed position is used     8   Time Valid The receiver has valid timing  information from GPS satellites   including current leap second  information   This is the final  state fo
164. gured to supply DNS server addresses  displays the DNS server IP  addresses supplied by DHCP  These values are not user editable     Note  If the SMTP Gateway  which supports Password Recovery and Email Notification of  Alarms  and NTP associations are addressed using domain names  a valid DNS server  address must be supplied to the SyncServer     Network Port Configuration    To edit the settings for a network port  click the corresponding EDIT button on the NET   WORK   Ethernet page  This opens a dialog box titled with the name of the port followed by   Configuration      To apply configuration changes  click APPLY buttons on both this configuration window and  later on the NETWORK   Ethernet page     Connection Mode     m Static  A user must configure the network port manually       DHCP  A DHCP server will automatically configure the network port when changes are  applied  Not available for IPV6      Disabled  This disables the network port     Note  If the Connection Mode is DHCP and the lease expires or the SyncServer reboots  a  DHCP server could assign a new IP address to the SyncServer s network port  If this occurs  with the LAN 1 port  use the STATUS button on the front panel to obtain the new IP address   Furthermore  if it occurs to a network port servicing NTP requests  NTP clients will no longer  be able to get a response from that port  In that case  the NTP clients would have to use an    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 21    Web Interface    alternate NTP source o
165. han higher frequencies  such as those used  by GPS   LF Radio receiver operation therefore depends on the following factors       The distance from transmitter to receiver      The orientation of the receiving antenna relative to the transmitter    a The orientation of the receiving antenna relative to the vertically polarized radio waves      The time of day      Local electromagnetic conditions such as shielding and sources of radio frequency noise   The best conditions are therefore      Areas closer to transmitters    a Antenna perpendicular to transmitter    a Antenna horizontal to ground    a Night time    a Low RFI noise   IFLF radio is being considered as the primary reference for the SyncServer  the Rubidium    oscillator option can be employed to provide long term holdover when the LFR signal is  impaired to the point where the SyncServer cannot lock to it     Unpacking  1  Verify that the part number  on the label of the large pink anti static bag  matches the  radio time service specified at the time of purchase   a 1520R LFR60 KIT for WWVB  60 kHz  Colorado  USA  a 1520R LFR77 KIT for DCF77  77 5 kHz  Hesse  Germany  a 1520R LFR60 KIT for JJY  60 kHz  Kyushu  Japan  a 1520R LFR40 KIT for JJY  40 kHz  Fukushima  Japan  2  Verify that the following items are present     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 161    Tasks    a RG 59 coaxial cable  50 ft  15 m    a LFR module  Disk shaped    a Mounting bracket  part  4186 8P  and a bag of 4 mounting screws  a 9 volt battery holder
166. he Hardware Clock changing state and the time qual   ity character changing     Here are some potential guidelines for configuring the Flywheel Quality Character  FQC      a The user sets the FQC to   if one or more of the following are true    a The S300 or S350 is configured with two or more synchronizing NTP associations  and the user is satisfied with using time from other NTP associations    a The SyncServer oscillator type has superior time keeping properties compared to  the receiving equipment  This is usually the case since most computer equipment  uses uncompensated quartz oscillators       u The user sets the FQC to  F  if the receiving equipment can handle  F  as a time quality  character in some way that is useful and distinct from the   or  X  time quality char   acters      The user sets the FQC to  X  so that the receiving equipment to handles time from NTP  or the Hardware Clock internal oscillator as  X   time invalid      Troubleshooting  If the time quality character remains  X   time invalid  even though Input  References are connected to the SyncServer       Verify that the physical connection to the input connector is valid and that there are no  cable breaks or short circuits       On the TIMING   HW Clock page  verify that the Input Reference is Enabled and that Forced  Timing Source is set to Auto        u For Timecode  on the REFERENCES   Timecode page  check that the Timecode Input set   ting matches the input signal type     a For GPS  wait for th
167. he LAN1 IP Address  Mask  and Gateway are valid using the STATUS but   ton to display LAN1 STATUS   u LANT may be disabled  If needed  turn it on using the Keypad Display as follows   1  Press MENU   2  Select 1  LAN1   3  Select 2  On Off   4  Select 1  On   a The Web Server may be turned off   a Cycle the power off and on again  Depending on the configuration of the SERV   ICES   Startup page  the web server may be available when the SyncServer fin   ishes rebooting  See Halting the SyncServer  on page 3    a Otherwise  log into the command line interface and turn the web server on using  the HTTP on command  See Command Line Interface  on page 95      After logging in to the web interface  select Auto for Web Server on the SERV   ICES   Startup page   u The SERVICES   HTTP page may be configured for Secure  Port 443  Only  If so  edit  the URL in the browser so that it begins with  https  instead of  http      Using NTP  AddingServer Associations    NTP server and peer associations provide an important backup source of time ifthe Sync   Server s Input References are unavailable  Having two or more server or peer associations  is important for reliability and redundancy     Symmetricom recommends keeping the three server associations included in the factory  default configuration  These point to NTP servers on the Internet operated by Symmetricom   located in USA      Optional  The user can add associations for NTP servers that reside on the company net   work        u For 
168. he local  SyncServer Hardware Clock  Also see Hardware Clock  on page 188      system peer mode  The relationship of the SyncServer to a system peer  usually a  client    Depending the configuration  the mode can be       Client  A host operating in this mode sends periodic messages regardless of the reach   ability state or stratum of its peer  By operating in this mode the host  usually a LAN work   station  announces its willingness to be synchronized by  but not to synchronize the peer       Symmetric Active  A host operating in this mode sends periodic messages regardless  of the reachability state or stratum of its peer  By operating in this mode the host  announces its willingness to synchronize and be synchronized by the peer    u Symmetric Passive  This type of association is ordinarily created upon arrival of a mes   sage from a peer operating in the symmetric active mode and persists only as long as the  peer is reachable and operating at a stratum level less than or equal to the host     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 25    Web Interface    otherwise  the association is dissolved  However  the association will always persist until  at least one message has been sent in reply  By operating in this mode the host  announces its willingness to synchronize and be synchronized by the peer     A host operating in client mode  a workstation  for example  occasionally sends an NTP mes   sage to a host operating in server mode  the SyncServer   perhaps right after rebooting and  
169. he modem association has been created  the user can influence how often the modem  calls the time service by modifying the Minimum Poll Interval  default 00 02 08  in  hh mm ss format  and Maximum Poll Interval  default 18 12 16  in hh mm ss format  on  the NTP   Config page  The interval between calls starts out close to the Minimum Poll Inter   val and gradually increases to the Maximum Poll Interval over a day or so  Decreasing  the Maximum Poll Interval improves timing accuracy  but also increases the frequency of  phone calls     Note  All communication and service charges are the responsibility of the user     The user can determine the highest acceptable value for the Maximum Poll Interval by mul   tiplying it with the estimated drift rate of the oscillator  given on the TIMING   Holdover page    For example  on a SyncServer equipped with a TCXO oscillator  the default Maximum Poll  Interval  18 12 16  translates into approximately 0 76 days or approximately 14 ms of drift  between synchronizations  This value may be acceptable for network timing applications  but  should be considered if more precise timing is required  particularly from the timing outputs  from the rear panel     Note  The settings on the TIMING   Holdover page do not apply to the modem association  they  only apply to the Hardware Clock Input References     Modem Configuration  Dial Configuration      Tone Dial  ATDT    Factory Default  Configures the modem for  touch tone  dialing  com   mon throug
170. hey are running the same Software Version  displayed on the STATUS   General  page    If you have physical access to the SyncServer  the easiest method for transferring the con   figuration is to use a USB flash drive and the front panel keypad     1  Create a backup file on a configured SyncServer  as described in Creating a Backup  File  on page 157     2  Restore that backup file to another SyncServer as described in Restoring from a  Backup File  on page 157      3  IMPORTANT  When the SyncServer reboots  immediately change the IP address of LAN1  using the front panel MENU button as described in Configuring LAN1  on page 138    This step resets all of the network port addresses and prevents network address col   lisions with the previous SyncServer     4  Login and use the NETWORK   Ethernet page to configure the network ports   5  On the SYSTEM   General page  update the Hostname     Restoringthe Factory Default Configuration  The user may wish to restore the factory default configuration in a variety of circumstances     a When the password is lost and the Recover Password feature is disabled  Use the Hard   ware Jumper method     a To erase the previous configuration prior to reconfiguring the SyncServer    m To erase site specific information such as the IP addresses and the GPS position  prior to  sending the SyncServer off site     In some cases  the user may back up the current configuration of the SyncServer prior to  restoring the factory default configuration  
171. his can usually be accom   plished by entering     shutdown  r now    To check NTP status  use the ntpq utility  included among the standard NTP packages     ConfiguringSymmTime    SymmTime is a Microsoft Windows compatible utility that synchronizes the user s PC to a  network time server  SymmTime is included with the SyncServer on a CD and is also avail   able as a free download from Symmetricom at http   www ntp sys   tems com symmtime asp  registration required      Installing and Configuring SymmTime  1  Log into Microsoft Windows with administrator privileges and install SymmTime     Page 150 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using NTP    2  Start SymmTime from the Windows Start menu  or right click the icon near the time dis   play in the lower right corner of the Windows desktop  The icon appears as a very small  blue  S  on a white circular  clock face     Right click SymmTime and select Sync Servers      Click the Add Server button    Enter the IP address of a network port on the SyncServer    Enter a descriptive title for  Server Location  and click OK     Use the white up arrow to the left of Active Servers to move the SyncServer to the top of  the list     NO oR  amp     Note  For online help  right click SymmTime and select Help     Testing SymmTime    1  Right click SymmTime and select Sync Status  This opens the Synchronization Status win   dow     2  Click the Sync Now button  SymmTime sends an NTP request to the SyncServer and  pauses   If SymmTime synchronizes  it dis
172. hout the world      Pulse Dial  ATDP   Configures the modem for pulse  rotary telephone  dialing  still used in  selected regions of the world    m None  User Dial Command   Makes AT commands available in the Dial Up Time Reference  Phone Number s  fields  Phone numbers must be preceded by a valid AT command  Some  potentially useful AT modem commands for getting an outside line from a PBX system    a AT XO establishes blind dialing and dials 0  common in Japan   a AT X9 establishes blind dialing and dials 9  common in USA     Note  Leave a space between T and X in the preceding commands     Modem Pre Test    The user can test a number by entering a number in the Test Number field and clicking the  TEST MODEM button  If successful   Modem Connected to Test Number  appears in small text  to the right of the CANCEL button  If the user does not supply a phone number  this feature    Page 60 997 01520 02 Rev  C    REFERENCES   Modem    verifies the operation of the modem  Testing a number does not synchronize the NTP dae   mon to the service     Preconfigured Phone Numbers  Selecting one of the service providers does two things     a Enters phone numbers for the dial up time service in the Dial Up Time Reference Phone  Number s  field s     a Sets the protocols  time code  and time scale the modem will use to decode the dial up  time service     Select one of the following services     m ACTS  NIST Automated Computer Time Service  ACTS  in the United States  See  http   tf nist g
173. i   mum  there should be blocks of vertical green bars for each night  If not  the user should  re evaluate the location of the LFR s location     Troubleshooting Antenna Locations    Ifthe LFR s LED indicates no signal  Solid On  or weak signal  Intermittent Flashing      a Test LFR reception at night time  Use the battery holder TNC cable       u Move the LFR away from sources of radio frequency interference  RFI   such as switch   ing power supplies  transmitting antennas  computers  transformers  HVAC  and other  electrical equipment or motors     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 163    Tasks    a Reposition the antenna away from or outside any shielding structures  such as metallic  enclosures       Ifastructure has too much RFI or shielding  it may be necessary to position the antenna  outdoors    a Check that your location is within reasonable range of an LF transmitter     Mounting Outdoors  When mounting the LFR outdoors     a Observe all local codes and regulations     lt may be necessary to use a lightning surge suppressor   a Position the antenna away from sources of radio frequency noise     Additional Resources    Online References    NIST Radio Station WWVB hiip   tf nist gov stations wwvb htm      PTB Website for DCF 77 http   www ptb de en org 4 44 442 dcf77 1 e htm     u Japan Standard Time Project   JJY htip   jjy nict go jp jy index e html    Symmetricom Worldwide Sales    Note  Please feel free to contact Symmetricom Worldwide Sales http   www    symmetricom com 
174. ically when the SyncServer reboots     Note  Services that cannot be directly turned off display grayed out On and Off radio buttons   These services can only be controlled by selecting or deselecting Auto Startup  Applying the  change will then stop or start the service as appropriate     System Control  Run  The SyncServer continues to operate normally  This is the default setting     Reboot  Reboots the SyncServer  During this process  the browser displays  This browser  will attempt to reconnect     When the SyncServer finishes rebooting  the browser displays  the login screen  provided DHCP hasn t changed the IP address      Halt  Halts the operating system after about 15 seconds  typically  While the SyncServer is  halting  the web interface displays  Halting System   This browser session cannot con   tinue     and the front panel display states  Shutting down  Please wait      Wait at least 15  seconds  and shut the power switch off     SERVICES   HTTP    Web Server Configuration    The SyncServer s web interface allows both standard and secure  encrypted  network  access  Standard access is provided by default  To use encrypted access  a secure cer   tificate must be created  The SyncServer can only use self signed certificates     Page 82 997 01520 02 Rev  C    SERVICES   SSH    Creating a new certificate overrides previously created certificates  The certificate values  used are not significant to the SyncServer  They are provided to any user using the cer   tificat
175. identifying the particular reference  clock  In the case of stratum O  unspecified  or  stratum 1  primary reference   this is a four    octet  left justified  zero padded ASCII string   While not enumerated as part of the NTP spec  the  following are suggested ASCII identifiers     DCN DCN routing protocol   NIST NIST public modem   TSP TSP time protocol   DTS Digital Time Service   ATOM Atomic clock  calibrated    VLF VLF radio  OMEGA  etc     callsign   Generic radio   LORC LORAN C radionavigation  GOES GOES UHF environment satellite  GPS GPS UHF satellite positioning    GPS GPS satellite    IRIG IRIG B timecode   PPS Ext  1PPS input   E10M Ext  10MHz input   FREE Internal Clock   FLY Internal Clock after the Hardware  Clock reference is lost    Hz  ntpSystem 6     ntpSysRefTime OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX DisplayString  SIZE 1  40    MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    NTP Reference Timestamp  Thisis the time    in timestamp format  converted to DisplayString    when the local clock was last updated  If the  local clock has never been synchronized  the value  is zero     Hz  ntpSystem 7     ntpSysPollOBJECT TYPE   SYNTAXInteger32   MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Minimum interval between transmitted messages  in    Page 176 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    seconds as a power of two  For instance  a value  of six indicates a minimum interval of 64 seconds    Hz  ntpSystem 8     ntpSysPeerOBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX Unsigned32   MAX ACCES
176. ient                                                          35  NTP   Prefs   gt   tasca Aba a a see AA is 36  PTP Option and Time Interval Test    cece cece cece cence 37  Time Interval Test                                                                                38  PTP and NTP Performance    38   PTP Management Messages    unaa 0iaarnn unnn nannnnn 40   How to Activate the PTP Option    41  BR   Masa oc  41   IEEE 1588 2008 Annex J Recommended Default Settings                                 45  PIPES IANG SA nna a aa ee este 45  PTP   Performance    46   Charting PTP Performance    47  PTP   Save Restore                                ence cece cece ee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47   To Save Configuration Settings to a File                                             48   To Restore Configuration Settings from a File                                         48  TIMING   Time Zone    aoaaa oaaao aaoo aoaaa 00000A LLDD LLD L22222 222222 48  TIMING   HW Clock    48  TIMING   Holdover  50    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page9    Web Interface    TIMING   Sysplex  nn 51  TIMING  Time Interval                                                              54  REFERENCES    GP  gj n   in dh i rnorirrnr1n1ni 57   GPS Position and Operating Mode    57  REFERENCES   Timecode                                                                  58  REFERENCES   Modem    59   RESTART button sie naea op cece Um BANA apa nagan KANA na 62  REFERENCES   LF Radio    cc  coi cos ores s   shkas its kend da
177. ies over a 5 minute period and sends email mes   sages at five minute intervals  so an email alert may contain more than 1 alarm  For Send  Email to work  the SERVICES   Email page must be configured with a valid SMTP Gateway  and email address  If the SMTP gateway is a DNS name  LAN1 on NETWORK   Ethernet must  be configured with a valid DNS server address     Note  When Clear Now and Auto Clear are used to clear an alarm  Send Trap  Write Log   and Send Email do not generate notification messages or log entries     Alarm Descriptions    Note  Alarm indicators for optional features or equipment appear when the related option is  present and enabled     NTP System Peer Change Alarm  The SyncServer s current NTP synchronization peer has  changed     NTP Stratum Change Alarm  The NTP Stratum level has degraded  For example  the NTP Stra   tum has gone from 1 to 2     NTP Leap Change Alarm  The SyncServer raises this alarm when the  eap indicator changes  state  See STATUS   NTP  on page 16      This change of state has two potential causes  The first is that the SyncServer was recon   figured  causing the NTP daemon to be restarted  More rarely  this can occur when the Sync   Server is within 24 hours of a leap second adjustment     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 73    Web Interface    System Network Alarm  Alarms if a configured port has no connection  network link   Clears if  all configured ports have connections     System Upgrade Alarm  The SyncServer checks for software upgrade
178. in  Window Mode   on page  133     Antenna Cable Delay   Use this setting to achieve the highest timing precision and accuracy on the timing outputs  such as IRIG Out or 1PPS Out  This setting has a negligible effect on NTP synchronization    because the scale of the adjustment  nanoseconds  is not significant compared to mil   lisecond latencies on typical networks     The Antenna Cable Delay advances the Hardware Clock slightly to cancel out the signal  delay caused by the length of the GPS antenna cable     To calculate the adjustment  select the signal propagation rate for the appropriate cable type  from the table below and multiply it by the length of the cable     Rate per foot   Rate per meter    RG 58 1 4 nS foot 4 59 nS meter  RG 59 1 24 nS foot 4 06 nS meter       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 57    Web Interface    For example  the standard 50 foot RG 59 antenna cable x 1 24 nS foot   62 nS of Antenna  Cable Delay     Or  using meters  the standard 15 24 meter RG 59 antenna cable x 4 06 nS meter   62 ns  of Antenna Cable Delay     Note  Use the Cable Delay setting on the REFERENCES   Timecode page to compensate for  the length of the Timecode Output cable  Avoid using Antenna Cable Delay for that purpose     REFERENCES   Timecode    Use this page to configure the timecode input and output on the SyncServer     Also see IRIG In  Timecode In   on page 107  and IRIG Out  Timecode Out   on page  108      Timecode Configuration    Status  Reports  locked  when the Timecode 
179. in an  350 is  lt 5E 11 month     Network Protocols    The SyncServer supports the following protocols     a NTP  v2 RFC1119  v3   RFC1305  v4   No RFC   Port 123   u NTP Unicast  Broadcast  Multicast   u SNTP v4 for IPv4  IPv6 and OSI  RFC 2030      TIME  RFC868   Port 37    u DAYTIME  RFC867   Port 13    s HTTP SSL HTTPS  RFC2616       DHCP  RFC2131      SSH SCP  Internet Draft    a SNMP v1 v2 v3  RFC3584     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 115    Specifications    a MIB II  RFC1213       Telnet  RFC854    a MD5 Authentication  RFC 1321     SMTP Forwarding      Pv4 and v      NTP    Description  Network Time Protocol Version 4 for synchronizing networked devices to UTC   standard     Timestamp accuracy  network port  Microsecond caliber NTP   NTP packet throughput rate Up to 7000 packets second while maintaining NTP timestamp accu   racy    Client synchronization accuracy  Approx  0 5 2 ms typical ona LAN   Supports IPv4 and IPv6   Security MD5 Symmetric Key and Autokey Authentication   Alarms System Peer Change  Stratum Change  Leap Change  and Timing NTP Daemon    Also see  STATUS   NTP  on page 16   NTP   Sysinfo  on page 25   NTP   Assoc  on page  28   NTP   Config  on page 30   NTP   MD5 Keys  on page 33   NTP   Autokey  on page 34    NTP   Autokey Client  on page 35   NTP   Prefs  on page 36   WIZARDS   NTP  on page  86   ADMIN   Alarms  on page 72   and Status LEDs  on page 3      CE WEEE RoHS Conformance    Declaration of Conformity  In accordance with ISO IEC GUIDE 22 and
180. inistrator  to obtain this information     Send Test Email  Select this option to verify that password recovery by email is configured cor   rectly and works     Note  Once applied  recovery question  answer  and email address data do not remain visible  on the page  The SMTP Gateway entered here is also used for email notification of alarms   However  email addresses for alarm notification are entered on the SERVICES   Email page   Email notification of alarms is configured on the ADMIN   Alarms page     ADMIN   Alarms    Alarm Configuration and Notification  Use this page to view alarm status and to perform the following tasks     a Configuring Alarm Severity  ALARM LED color     a Manually clearing alarms    a Configuring Alarms to clear automatically after 15 minutes    a Configuring notification by SNMP traps and email messages   u Logging of alarms  notification events     The Alarm LED at the top left corner of the web interface and on the front panel indicates the  highest severity alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms page     a Red  Alarm with severity   Major     Orange  Alarm with severity   Minor   a Green  Alarm with severity   Notification  or no alarms     Alarm Configuration and Notification   Name  Describes the system event that causes the alarm  Also see Alarm Descriptions  on  page 73     State  A graphic LED indicating the alarm state and severity at the time the page was gen   erated     a Grey LED  Severity is set to Notify    a Green LED  Severity is Major or M
181. inor  and there is no alarm    m Orange LED  Severity is set to Minor  and there is an alarm       u Red LED  Severity is set to Major  and the alarm there is an alarm     Page 72 997 01520 02 Rev  C    ADMIN   Alarms    Note  To check the current state  click the refresh icon  rotating arrows  at the lower right  corner of the page     Clear Now  This checkbox is only available during an alarm  To clear the alarm  select the  Clear Now checkbox and click the APPLY button  Doing so returns the alarm to a  No  Alarm  state     Auto Clear  Automatically clears the alarm after 15 minutes  regardless of the condition that  caused it     Severity  Determines the Alarm LED response to an alarm and sets the  Level   in the SNMP  trap  email message  and log entry       Notify  Does not raise an alarm  No change to Alarm LED color      Minor  Raises a minor system alarm  Alarm LED   Orange      Major  Raises a major system alarm  Alarm LED   Red      Note  Ifenabled  Send Trap  Write Log  and Send Email operate in response to alarms   regardless of Severity     Send Trap  Sends an SNMP trap when the alarm occurs and ends  SNMP must be con   figured correctly on the NETWORK   SNMP and NETWORK   SNMP Traps pages for this to work     Write Log  Generates a log entry in syslog when the alarm occurs and ends  The log can be  viewed from the LOGS   syslog page     Send Email  Generates a descriptive entry in an email message when the alarm occurs and  ends  The SyncServer compiles the entr
182. is  Class Timing    UU aasa   VV vj  CU Muekonmmaewgass   y  y  v  y  RE je  Lee NTP UTC or GPS Times Yi       Page 8 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Web Interface    This section provides a topic for each page in the web interface  with an explanation of each  field  notes  and links to related topics     This section contains     oTo I a Senge BO A TE 11   Properties of User Names and Passvvords            0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 11  STATUS   General a 12  STATUS   Network    13  STATUS   Timing                                             ce 14  STATUS  GPS ot o ice 14   WARNING  GPS Position and Altitude    16  STATUS   NTP  ooo ooo ccc aaa 16   NTP Daemon Status    000 aa0a0aaa 0000000000000 ooa aaa 000A LLD PL LL L ra 2 22L 16  STATUS   P UP icono L   e na Jad 0000000000000000 0 0000220000 NG oaaao 2ra 19   PTP Daemon Status    19  STATUS  Alarms  eec eee eceeeeeeeeeeesees 20  NETWORK   Ethernet    aaa 20  NETWORK   SNMP    Lidil  23  NETWORK   SNMP Traps  24  NETWORK PUN ecclesia des tt lee 25  NTP A II ese 25   NTP Daemon Status    00n0 0000000000000000 0000o a00 0000A LLL PAL 22 2 a222 25  NTP   ASSOC                                                                                           28  NTP  Confiq   000000000000000 aaa 0000000000000000 oaaao aaao daaa a aoaaa oaaao a aaan 30  NTP   MD5 Keys  came ner si dd rt bb png pako Ag PANA Gb Ea di riadas 33  NTP   Autokey  0   000000000 0000000000000000 000000000010000 aaa a aooaa aoaaa aaan 34  NTP   Autokey Cl
183. itiatives htm   RoHS   Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances Directive 2002 95 EC    The SyncServer Model 1520R SXXX is considered WEEE Category 3  IT and Tel   ecommunications Equipment  as defined by the WEEE Directive and therefore falls within  the scope of the RoHS Directive     These units are ROHS Compliant except that they will be manufactured using the ROHS  Directive exemption allowing the use of lead in  solders for servers  storage and storage  array systems  network infrastructure equipment for switching  signaling  transmission as  well as network management for telecommunications   Reference RoHS Directive Annex  Point 7 as amended by 2005 747 EC     Note  This certification applies to all standard options and accessories supplied with the Sync   Server System   Signature   First Date of Marketing with CE Mark  31 August 2005    I declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Stand   ards     Signed  Robert Mengelberg  Compliance Engineer  Date  29 March 2007    Safety Standards    Meets the following safety standards     a 73 23 EEC CE Low Voltage Safety Directive     EN 60950 1 2001    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 117    Specifications       u UL 60950 1 2003   a CSA 22 2 60950 1 2003     u IEC 60950 1 2001   a AS NZ 60950 1 2003   a PSE Japan    EMC Standards    Meets the following EMC standards     a FCC Part 15 Subpart B   a 2004 108 ECCE EMC Directive   a EN61000 3 2 2000Harmonic Current   a EN61000 3 3 1995V
184. l NTP clients that it is unsynchronized by setting leap indicator to  11 and stratum to 16     Page 36 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP Option and Time Interval Test    2  Typical Operation  After synchronizing to an NTP association the NTP daemon uses leap  indicator and stratum normally  Leap indicator reports whether a leap event is pending   usually 00   no alarm   Stratum reports the stratum of the NTP daemon relative to the  system peer  usually 1 through 3     3  Loss of All References  If the NTP daemon cannot get the time from any association      With Standard NTP Rules  Factory Default  The stratum and leap indicator remain  the same as they were in the Typical Operation stage  The system peer remains  the unchanged  but the reference time stamp isn t updated and the reach statistic  gradually decreases to zero      With Override Behavior  if the estimated time error exceeds the Time Error Limit on  the TIMING   Holdover page  stratum reports 16 and leap indicator reports 11  as  they did during in the Startup stage     After Loss of All References  ifthe NTP daemon synchronizes with an NTP association  again  it resumes Typical Operation     Comments        Given a pool of NTP associations from which to choose  an NTP client typically syn   chronizes with the best one  and does not require Override Behavior to eliminate poor  associations       u Given a lack of NTP associations from which to choose  an NTP client may reject a Sync   Server with better timing accuracy a
185. l notification of alarms     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 13    Web Interface    STATUS   Timing    Hardware Clock Status    Current Sync Source  The Input Reference currently used by the Hardware Clock  Consult the  TIMING   HW Clock topic for more information     Hardware Clock Time  The time according to the Hardware Clock     Hardware Clock Status   Locked  means the Hardware Clock is synchronized to one of its ref   erences  or to the internal oscillator in  Holdover    Unlocked  means the Hardware Clock  doesn t have an Input Reference and the Holdover period has expired  Also see TIMING    HW Clock  on page 48  and TIMING   Holdover  on page 50      Oscillator Type  The type of the oscillator installed in the Hardware Clock for operation and  holdover     For each of the following Input Status lines   Locked  means that the reference is valid and  can be selected by the Hardware Clock   Unlocked  means the reference is not valid  and is  therefore not available for use by the Hardware Clock  Also see TIMING   HW Clock  on  page 48  to arrange the priority of the Input References     Some of these references are options or are only available in specific SyncServer models    Consult Product Overview  on page 5  for more information about features and models      GPS Input Status  Timecode Input Status  1PPS Input Status  10MHz Input Status  LFR Input Status  TIJE1 Input Status    Leap Warning  The state of the Leap Indicator  on page 189  as reported by the current input  re
186. le all of the Input References and click the APPLY but   ton     2  Onthe NTP   Config page  delete UTC based NTP associations that have the following  roles  server  peer  broadcastclient  and multicastclient     3  Add non UTC server  peer  broadcastclient  and multicastclient associations     Also see  Using NTP  on page 144      Configuring SNMP  On the SyncServer  SNMP        u Responds to requests for configuration and operational information    m Sends traps in response to events  as configured on the ADMIN   Alarms page      Cannot be used to change the SyncServer s configuration  is read only    SNMP related pages on the SyncServer     m WIZARDS   SNMP  Configure SNMP quickly  SNMP v1 and v2c only       NETWORK   SNMP  Configure SNMP and add v3 users        NETWORK   SNMP Traps  Configure trap recipients    m ADMIN   Alarms  Select which events generate SNMP traps    m SERVICES   Startup  Stop or start the SNMP daemon  and enable disable it from starting  automatically when the SyncServer reboots     Configuring the SyncServer for SNMP queries  For SNMP v1 v2c queries  specify a Read Community string on the NETWORK   SNMP page     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 171    Tasks    For SNMP v3 queries  create v3 Users on the NETWORK   SNMP page     Additional standard SNMP values  such as sysL ocation and sysContact are also specified  on the NETWORK   SNMP page     The SyncServer Product CD includes a copy of the SyncServer custom MIB file that can be  loaded into SNMP managem
187. lease Version  The system release version    m Software Version  The software version      Hardware Clock Version  The version of the software on the Hardware Clock      Up Time  The time elapsed since the operating system started    m Load Average  A figure of merit for the operating system    load    for the previous 1  5  and  15 minutes  left to right       Memory Used  Mbyte   The amount of memory occupied by the system      Memory Free  Mbyte   The amount of free memory remaining      Flash  The type of compact flash card installed      CPU Vendor  The CPU vendor manufacturer      Model  The CPU model      Number  The CPU number     STATUS   Network    Network Status for each of the SyncServer s network ports       u The name of the Port      The following Address information for each network port       mac  The MAC Address   a v4  The IPv4 Address  if used     V6 link  The IPv6 Address  if used      The State of the physical network port device  not of the connection   An  Up Arrow    means it is  running   A  Down Arrow  means it is  not running      Management Port DNS Servers  Both user entered and DHCP assigned DNS Server  addresses that are available from the LAN1 port     The SyncServer requires at least one valid DNS server to resolve domain names  which  may be used in NTP associations  and SMTP gateways  email   Without a DNS server  any  function that uses a DNS name instead of an IP address may be affected  These can include  NTP  password recovery  and emai
188. lock with  values defined as follows     0 unspecified   1 primary reference  e g   calibrated atomic  clock  radio clock    2 255 secondary reference  via NTP     Hz  ntpSystem 2     ntpSysPrecision OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAX Integer32   MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current   DESCRIPTION    Current NTP precision value  This is a signed   integer indicating the precision of the various   clocks  in seconds to the nearest power of two    The value must be rounded to the next larger power   of two  for instance  a 50 Hz  20ms  or 60 Hz  16 17ms   power frequency clock would be assigned the value    5  31 25ms   while a 1000 Hz  1ms  crystal controlled  clock would be assigned the value  9  1 95ms      Hz  ntpSystem 3     ntpSysRootDelay OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXOCTET STRING  MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Total roundtrip delay to the primary reference  source at the root of the synchronization   subnet  in seconds  Also known as root distance    Hz  ntpSystem 4     ntpSysRootDispersion OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXOCTET STRING  MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Maximum error relative to the primary reference  source at the root of the synchronization subnet   in seconds  Only positive values greater than  zero are possible     Hz  ntpSystem 5     ntpSysReflD OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAX DisplayString  SIZE  1  40    MAX ACCESS read only   STATUS current    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 175    Tasks    DESCRIPTION    NTP Reference Clock Identifier  This is a   32 bit code 
189. me  on page 169    This setting has no effect when the Hardware Clock is locked to non GPS references     WARNING  The Free Run and Ignore UTC Corrections from GPS Reference settings can  have serious effects upon timing networks and systems that expect UTC time  These settings  should only be used by knowledgeable and authorized persons under carefully controlled con   ditions     Use the APPLY button to apply changes to the configuration     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 49    Web Interface    TIMING   Holdover    Overview    The SyncServer uses holdover to continue operating as a stratum 1 NTP server peer for a  period of time if the Input References become unavailable     For example  A SyncServer in a downtown office building gets time from GPS  Surrounding  skyscrapers occasionally block signals from the GPS satellites as they move across the sky   causing  gaps  that last several hours  The SyncServer uses holdover to continue operating  asa stratum 1 NTP server during these gaps     The factory default settings are appropriate for most situations  However  the user should  consider extending holdover to cover the longest anticipated  gap  if more than one of the fol   lowing conditions is true     a The SyncServer is the only NTP server available to the NTP clients    a The SyncServer only has one Hardware Clock Input Reference  e g   GPS  Timecode      The Hardware Clock is the only NTP association listed on the NTP   Assoc page    a Restoring an Input Reference would tak
190. n  This restarts the NTP daemon  putting all of the keys into  effect     The SyncServer automatically trusts all of the NTP keys     Using MD5 Keys on a Generic NTP device    This topic is a guide to configuring MD5 authentication for NTP on a UNIX or Linux operating  system  Specifics  such as the location of files  vary by implementation     Note  Use secure methods for configuring NTP authentication and transferring key files   The following sections refer to the MD5 keys file       Ifyou created the MD5 keys on the SyncServer  replace  lt keysfile gt  with ntp keys    Page 152 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using NTP    a Ifyou created the MD5 keys using the nip keygen utility  replace  lt keysfile gt  with ntpkey   so the steps apply to both the keys file and the symbolic link file   The ntp keygen utility is  typically included with the standard open source NTP distribution      Uploading MD5 keys to a generic NTP device    Securely transport the MD5 keys file to the destination NTP node  This can be done by a vari   ety of means  such as physical media or encrypted communications such as ssh and scp  For  example        Login as root    a Copy the MD5 keys file to  root   cp  mnt floppy  lt keysfile gt   root      u Make the MD5 keys file read write for root   chmod 600  lt keysfile gt     Edit ntp conf   a Edit ntp conf  For example  enter   vi  etc ntp conf   a Add one of these two lines     keys  root ntp keys points to keys file from SyncServer  keys  root ntpkeys MD5  lt
191. n 1 January 1900  The integer part is in the first 32 bits and the fraction part in the last 32  bits  In the fraction part  the non significant low order bits are not specified and ordinarily set  to 0    Originate Timestamp    Time at the client when the request departed for the server  in 64 bit NTP timestamp format     Receive Timestamp    Time at the server when the request arrived from the client  in 64 bit NTP timestamp format     Transmit Timestamp    Time at the server when the response left for the client  in 64 bit NTP timestamp format     Key Identifier    This is a 32 bit unsigned integer used by the client and server to designate a secret 128 bit  MD5 key  Together  the Key Identifier and Digest fields collectively are called message  authentication code  MAC      Message Digest    This is a 128 bit string computed by the keyed MD5 message digest algorithm  Together  the  Key Identifier and Digest fields collectively are called message authentication code  MAC      PING    PING is a utility for testing network connectivity to a particular IP address or URL  The user  typically sends a ping request by entering  ping  followed by the IP address or URL of the    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 193    Glossary    device to be reached  If the device is unreachable  the response is typically  request timed  out   If the device was reachable  the response is  reply from     followed by various ping sta   tistics  The ping utility is available on the SyncServer s NETWORK   Pin
192. n anordning som  elektrisk isolering under en viss frekvensomradet  galvaniskt isolator  se EN60728 11      Anm  rkning  i Norge  till f  ljd av f  rordningen for installationer av kabel distributionssystem   och i Sverige  en galvaniskt isolator skall ge elektrisk isolering under 5 MHz  isolering skall  tala ett dielektriskt av 1 5 kV r m s  50 Hz eller 60 Hz for 1 minut     Connecting VDC Power  For units equipped with the optional 48 VDC power supply        u Use a 14 amp DC circuit breaker in series with the DC power source  Do not connect the  unit directly toa DC power source without the breaker     Page 128 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    m Provide a circuit disconnect in series with the VDC Power input  The SyncServer DC  option does not include a power switch   a The minimum recommended wire size is 14 AWG  1 5mm2  for DC power source hook  up  Don t forget to tighten the terminal screws on the input power block      The VDC Power supply in the SyncServer is DC isolated  The VDC Power inputs are  polarity protected so reversed DC connections will not power the unit but will also not  harm the unit    a Connect VDC Power to the PRI or optionally the SEC set of terminals observing correct  polarity         The SEC set of terminals has been provided for connections to a sec   ondary power source  Note that the PRI and SEC power connections are simply diode  OR   ed  so the highest voltage source will be powering the unit     The PRI and SEC ground terminals
193. n or  PAM  Pluggable Authentication Module      kern log  The kernel log contains entries submitted by the kernel  Examples of kernel events  are network errors or hardware changes     daemon log  The daemon log contains entries submitted by the daemon processes that pro   vide the services in the SyncServer  Examples of daemon log entries are NTP changes   SNMP events  and xinetd events     messages  The messages file is something of a catchall file  By selecting various priorities  it  is possible to capture large amounts of data regarding system operation  However  the vol   ume of data becomes impractical to manage quickly  As such  this file is cleared at each  power cycle or reboot     events  The events log is not configurable  This log is maintained outside syslogd and con   tains configuration and event data related to operations performed in the web interface     Log Priorities    Page 78 997 01520 02 Rev  C    ADMIN   Logs Config    In the case of kernel  syslog  auth and daemon logs  the priority specified will cause all mes   sages greater than or equal to the selected priority to be logged  The priorities are defined in  ascending order     In the case of the messages log  only the selected priorities are logged  As such  up to four  priority levels are supported     Debug  This priority level captures debug output from applications designed to produce this  type of output  This level generates a large volume of traffic and is not recommended unless   it is done
194. nd 16  This value is always  positive     Reference Identifier    This is a 32 bit code identifying the particular server or reference clock  The interpretation  depends on the value in the stratum field  For stratum 1  reference clock  this is a four octet   left justified  zero padded ASCII string assigned to the radio clock  The following have been  used as ASCII identifiers    GOESGeosynchronous Orbit Environment Satellite   GPSGlobal Positioning System   PPSGeneric pulse per second   IRIGInter Range Instrumentation Group   WWVBLF Radio WWVB  Ft  Collins  CO  60 kHz    Page 192 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PING    DCF7LF Radio DCF77  Mainflingen  DE  77 5 kHz   MSFLF Radio MSF  Rugby  UK  60 kHz   JJYLF Radio JJY  Fukushima  JP  40 kHz    JJYLF Radio JJY  Saga  JP  60 kHz   WWVHF Radio WWV  Ft  Collins  CO   WWVHHE Radio WWVH  Kaui  HI   NISTNational Institute of Standards and Technology telephone modem  PTBPhysikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt telephone modem   For strata 2 15 secondary servers  this is the reference identifier of the system peer  If the  system peer is using the IPv4 address family  the identifier is the four octet IPv4 address  If    the system peer is using the IPv6 address family  it is the first four octets of the MD5 hash of  the IPv6 address     Reference Timestamp    Time when the system clock was last set or corrected  in 64 bit NTP timestamp format  NTP  timestamps are represented as a 64 bit unsigned fixed point number  in seconds relative to   Oh o
195. nd stability than itself  if Override Behavior is ena   bled    a The SyncServer s NTP daemon can get time from a server  peer  broadcastclient  and  multicastclient associations       u Also see NTP Daemon Status  on page 16   TIMING   HW Clock  on page 48   TIM   ING   Holdover  on page 50   Leap Indicator  on page 189   and Stratum  on page  194     RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     PTP Option and Time Interval Test    The precision time protocol  PTP  option allows the user to configure the S300 Series Sync   Server into a IEEE 1588 2008 Grandmaster  This hardware based PTP option is only sup   ported on LAN2 of the S300 and S350 SyncServers  The Time Interval Measurement is  included as part of the PTP option on the S350 only     When the PTP option is not activated on a S300 S350 SyncServer  the PTP button  fourth  from top  of the web interface will be grayed out  If PTP was not factory installed  See  How  to Activate the PTP Option  on page 41     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 37    Web Interface    Once the PTP option is activated on a S300 S350 SyncServer  the PTP button on the web  interface will become active  In addition to the PTP option button  upon activation  several  other web pages will becom
196. nge   This option is intended for use as a  backup to more accurate Input References     Please feel free to contact Symmetricom Worldwide Sales http   www    Symmetricom comi online to borrow a stand alone kit for evaluating LF Radio reception in a  variety of locations     Purchasing        u The LF radio option is available only for the S300 and S350     Itcan be purchased with the SyncServer  or separately     Page 160 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using LF Radio    a Atthe time of purchase  the user specifies the frequency of the radio time service   The four radio time services are     a WWVB  transmitting at 60 kHz  located near Fort Collins  Colorado  USA  at coor   dinates  40  40  north  105  2  west         DCF77  transmitting at 77 5 kHz  located near Mainflingen and Frankfurt  Hesse  Ger   many  at coordinates  50  01  north  09  00    east    a JJY  transmitting at 60 kHz  located on Hagane yama  Saga prefecture  Kyushu Island   Japan  at coordinates  33  28  north 130  11  east    a JJY  transmitting at 40 kHz  located on Ohtakadoya yama  Fukushima prefecture  Japan   at coordinates  37  22  north 140  51  east     The LF radio option derives UTC from all of these services  JJY transmits Japan Standard  Time    The low frequency  long wavelength  signals from these transmitters   a Propagate over long distances as ground waves  following the curvature of the Earth     Have significantly greater range at night than at day   a Penetrate structures and obstacles better t
197. nges the format and contents of the time display       Large numeric time display on full screen  Hours Minutes Seconds    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 89    Keypad Display Interface    a Medium numeric time display on the left  current reference and NTP Stratum on the right     u Small date and time  reference  and NTP stratum     The time display also indicates a time scale         Ifthe time zone setting on TIMING   Time Zone page is set to UTC  the time display shows   UTC  as the time scale      Ifthe time zone setting on TIMING   Time Zone page is set to a non UTC  local  time zone   the time display leaves the time scale blank  or adds AM PM if the user selects the 12   hour time scale   Press the MENU button and select 2  Display  gt  3  12 24  gt  1  12  AM PM         Ifthe Ignore UTC Corrections from GPS Reference setting on the TIMING   HW Clock page  is enabled  selected   the time display shows  GPS  as the time scale     Note  The TIMING   Time Zone page configures the display for UTC or local time  The TIMING    HW Clock can be used to display GPS time  not recommended   Also see TIMING   Time  Zone  on page 48  and TIMING   HW Clock  on page 48      STATUS Button    Pressing the STATUS button repeatedly displays a series of status screens for     u NTP   a Alarms      u Network Ports   a Hardware Clock   a GPS Receiver   a SyncServer model  serial number  software version  and software upgrade availability     The upper right corner of each screen displays the use
198. ning part of a long  string of commands  For example     ipv4address 192 168 2 2 ipv4mask 255 255 255 0    gateway 192 168 2 1  lt enter gt     will set the IP address and subnet mask but not the gateway         question mark  Displays commands available at the current tree level     Command Examples  Below are a few select examples of commands   DEFAULTS example    Entering DEFAULTS replaces the current configuration of the SyncServer with the factory  configuration  Enter  Y  to confirm  For example    1 2 DEFAULTS   Restore SyncServer default factory configuration  Enter  Y  to confirm   Y   REBOOT example          997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 97    Command Line Interface    Entering REBOOT halts and reboots the SyncServer s operating system  Enter  Y  to con   firm  For example    1   REBOOT   Reboot SyncServer operating system  Enter  Y  to confirm  Y    HALT example          Entering HALT halts the operating system  Do this before turning the power switch off  Enter   Y  to confirm  Enter  Y  to confirm  For example     gt  HALT   Halt SyncServer operating system  Enter  Y  to confirm  Y    IPV4ADDRESS example  Entering IPV4ADDRESS displays sets the IPv4 address  For example     1   IPV4ADDRESS  192 168 47 150   2   IPV4ADDRESS 192 168 46 144  IPV4MASK example    Entering IPV4MASK displays sets the IPv4 subnet mask  For example           3   IPV4MASK   299 2 2029040   4 7 IPV4MASK 255 255 0 0  IPV4GATEWAY example    Entering IPVAGATEVVAY displays sets the IPv4 gateway addre
199. nutes   e Last 15 Minutes   e Last Hour   e AllData   e Custom Data Range       997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 55    Web Interface    You can also set up the Histogram chart from the Data menu or Reload Data from the data   base to the chart     7 Applet HTML Page   Mozilla Firefox DER     http   192 168 47 49 ppsApplet html   Data   Graph    Last 5 Minutes PPS Time Interval Measurement  Last 15 Minutes  Last Hour   gt  All Data  Custom Data Range       Histogram Setup     Reload Data       v       Time  UTC        x   No Rank    After a test has completed  you can zoom in on portions of the data set by selecting the Cus   tom Data Range    and changing the Start Date to Display or Stop Date to Display     You can configure the way the Histogram chart is displayed using the Histogram Setup     selection in the Data menu  When the Dynamic Scale checkbox is selected  the Histogram  chart sets the first peak of the data in the center and automatically sets the x axis values  appropriately for an equal Section Size  If this value does not work for your data  uncheck  the Dynamic Scale and manually select values for Start  End and Section Size     Histogram Setup       Scale     Start  ns      Section Size  ns    End  ns                     Page 56 997 01520 02 Rev  C    REFERENCES   GPS    If none of the provided charts meets the needs of your data set  please use the Save AS     function provided on the TIMING  Time Interval page to export your data to the tool of your  choice for fur
200. nutes to 14 days     This page has a text box to log the slaves  The number of slaves tracked is shown below the  text box  For each slave  there are three parameters monitored     a Address shows the IP address of the slave  xxx xxx xxx xxx   a Last Access shows the date and time of the last access   MM DD YYYY HH MM      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 45    Web Interface    a Activity shows an activity message in red text if the slave is inactive  or in blue text if  the slave is active  An example of an active message would be  Active within the last  10 minutes  in blue text     Below the text box logging the slaves are three options to clear slaves from the SyncServer  monitoring list      Remove ALL Slaves   a Remove ALL Slaves Not accessed for 1 Day      u Remove ALL Slaves Not accessed for 7 Days    After making one of these three selections  click the APPLY button to activate the selection   or click the CANCEL button to abort the process     Note  Slaves inactive for 14 days will be automatically removed    PTP   Performance    This page will provide insights into SyncServer PTP Grandmaster operations     Itis set up as a running log  in 15 Minute Performance Intervals for up to 4 days  For each  logged interval  you can see the start time in 15 minutes increments  showing     a How many delay requests were generated   a How many Sync Messages were sent   a How full is the queue    e For example  if the PTP slave activity is increasing  then the PTP packet  queues can sta
201. o  Prop   erties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Retype New Password  Confirm the spelling of the password by entering it one more time     Password Recovery  Select this checkbox to enable password recovery from the Login page   With password recovery enabled  the user can reset the password from the Login page by  correctly answering the password recovery question  The SyncServer then sends an email  message containing a new automatically generated password to the email address supplied  on the ADMIN   Users page  After logging in  the user can reset the password to a known  value     Note  The SyncServer does not provide a method for recovering forgotten usernames  If all  usernames have been forgotten  restore the factory configuration using the hardware  jumper  See Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  on page 158      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 71    Web Interface    Recovery Question  Select one of the standard recovery questions  or create a custom ques   tion     Answer  Enter the answer to the recovery question  Case sensitive   Email Address  The email address to which the password recovery message is sent     SMTP Gateway  The email server that forwards the password recovery message  e g   smtp d   omainname com   The SyncServer must have a valid SMTP Gateway addresses for pass   word recovery to work  If LAN 1 is unable to reach a DNS server  the SMTP gateway must   be entered as an IP address  not as a DNS name  If needed  contact a network adm
202. ociations             000000000000000000 0000000000020022 22 222222221 144  Adding Peer Associations                                                   145  Verifying Server and Peer Associations                                               146  Adding Broadcast Associations  146  Adding Multicast Associations                                                  147  Configuring NTP Clients  148   Using the Modem for Dial up Time Service                                            149  Working with Generic NTP Devices        0000000000000000000000000000000020022211i 150  Configuring SymmTime  2 2 2 2    222  cnn nn nn cece cceccececcccceccesececeeeees 150   Using NTP Authentication    a a  iii  151  Using MD5 Keys on a SyncServer                                   151  Using MD5 Keys on a Generic NTP device                                             152  Using Autokey  0 ccc cece cece cece cece ccc cececceeeeeceeeeeececeeeeeeetees 154  Enabling Secure Login    ccc cece cece aaa 155  Recovering a PASsrvO TA    0000000000000000 0000000000000000 LADA 02 02r 2222 155  Halting the SYNTSET VET    aaa 156  CAUTION  Stopping the SyncServer                                   156  Backing Up Restoring Configurations    156  Creating a Backup File    157  Restoring from a Backup File                                    157  Transferring Configurations          000000000000000000000 000000000 o aao ao oar ar222n 158  Restoring the Factory Default Configuration        158  WARNING  Removing Povv
203. odels  The LF radio option operates as an Input Reference     Also see Using LF Radio  on page 160      Low Frequency Radio Configuration  Installed Radio Option  Specify the format of the radio time service for decoding       Not Installed  Default   disables the LF radio module    xm WWVB  60 kHz    s DCF77  77 5 kHz       u JJY  40 kHz or 60 kHz  The customer specifies the frequency at the time the LF Radio  option is purchased     Select Not Installed   a Ifthe LF radio option isn t present   The 72 hour Reachability Chart shows a series of color coded vertical bars     a Green   Time was decoded      u Red  Time was not decoded     The height  y axis  of the bars indicates a figure of merit  For example  the taller the green  bar  the better the signal and the more often the signal was decoded during the 15 minute  interval     When choosing a location for the LF Antenna module  seek the one with the shortest red  bars during the day  and the tallest green bars at night     Each tick mark along the bottom of the graph represents an hour  with extended tick marks  for 6 and 24 hour periods     Page 62 997 01520 02 Rev  C    REFERENCES   T1 E1    Each green or red vertical bar represents a 15 minute interval  with four bars per hour  The  most recent data is displayed on the right  and the data moves from right to left     REFERENCES   T1 E1    T1 E1 Setup  Use this page to view T1 E1 input status  and configure the T1 E1 output     Input  fa TIJE1 input is connected to th
204. oltage Fluctuations and Flicker   a EN55022 1998Conducted and Radiated Emissions Standard      u EN55024 1998Immunity Standard   a VCCI  April 2000Japan EMC Standard   a ICES 003Canada EMC Standard   a AS NZS CISPR 22 2002Australia New Zealand EMC Standard    Note  In some cases  for FCC and CE EMC Radiated Emission Compliance  a ferrite EMI  suppressor  Fair Rite P N 0444164951 or equivalent  may need to be placed on the unit end  of cables connected to the BNC Connectors  Please contact Symmetricom Customer  Assistance  on page v  for additional information     VCCI Compliance Information    This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Inter   ference by Information Technology Equipment  VCCI   If this equipment is used in a domes   tic environment  radio interference may occur  in which case the user may be required to  take corrective actions     TOK  S  BRASS ERE AA n     VCCI  OB  CEJIK 47 AA   BAHAKECI  TOK       KR GERI SEER  MAE  AEI EHH  COBRA  HANS ARERIHEIERETNATEH6HUKY     Listing of Memory Devices    The following devices contain either volatile or non volatile memory     ETX Module    a 512MB SDRAM  The 512MB Synchronous Dynamic RAM is installed on the ETX Mod   ule in a DIMM socket  This part is used as system RAM memory for the ETX Module s    Page 118 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Reliability    x86 processor  The content in this device is volatile and is lost when the SyncServer is  powered down  This part is socketed  ETX  
205. om an external reference into the Sync Server s Hardware Clock  For the Sync   Server to maintain lock to this signal  the stability of the 1PPS input must be better than the pull   range of the system oscillator   Connector BNC female  1PPS In   Amplitude TTL Levels  Pulse Width100 nS minimum  On Time Edge Rising  Impedance 270 Ohms  Typical system oscillator pull ranges   a TCXO 1E 6  1 ppm   a OCXO 5E 7  0 5 ppm      Rubidium 1E 9  1 ppb     Note  If the 1PPS In signal is too noisy  the Hardware Clock may not be able to lock to it     Page 106 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Rear Panel    1PPS Out    Description 1PPS Out  a female BNC connector mounted on the rear chassis  provides a once  per second pulse that is synchronous with the SyncServer s Hardware Clock     Connector BNC female  1PPS Out   Amplitude TTL Levels into 50 Ohms  Duty Cycle 50  nominal   On Time Edge Rising    IRIG In  Timecode In     Description IRIG In accepts a time code for input from an external timing reference into the Sync   Server s Hardware Clock  The time code format is selected via the Web interface  Supports both  amplitude modulated  AM  and DC level shifted  DCLS  inputs  For the SyncServer to maintain  lock to this signal  the stability of the time code input must be better than the pull range of the  system oscillator  Also see REFERENCES   Timecode  on page 58  and IRIG Control Func   tion Bits  on page 109    Connector IRIG In  BNC female  DCLS Amplitude  lt 1 5 V for logic 0  52 0 V for logic
206. on the  SyncServer  The definition of the variables is provided     u kernel  The NTP daemon is enabled for the precision time kernel support for the ntp_  adjtime   system call      monitor  The NTP daemon is enabled its monitoring facility      ntp  Enables the server to adjust its local clock by means of NTP      stats  The NTP daemon is enabled itsstatistics facility    u auth  The NTP daemon is enabled itsauthentication facility     jitter  Jitter  also called timing jitter  refers to short term variations in frequency with com   ponents greater than 10 Hz     stability  Stability refers to how well the SyncServer can maintain a constant frequency over  time  It is usually affected by aging  environment changes  etc  The value is expressed units  of parts per million  ppm      broadcastdelay  The broadcast and multicast modes require a special calibration to deter   mine the network delay between the local and remote servers  Typically  this is done auto   matically by the initial protocol exchanges between the client and server  This is the  broadcast or multicast delay reported by the NTP daemon  The value is always set to 0 004  seconds on the SyncServer     authdelay  When NTP authentication is enabled and performed on outgoing NTP packets   this adds a trivial amount of fixed delay that can be removed based on the authdelay value   This value is always set to zero on the SyncServer     RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button 
207. on the oscillator installed  Shown below is the  Allan Deviation Stability of the system when synchronized to GPS     1x10 12 at 1 day All oscillators  3x10 12 at 100 sec Rb Only       LA ccuracy with default polling intervals  Can be degraded with longer polling interval     Page 114 997 01520 02 Rev  C    GPS Antenna    GPS Antenna    Frequency 1575     2 MHz   Impedance 50 ohms   Voltage 5   18 VDC   Power handling  1 watt   Enclosure All weather   Operating temp  55   C to  85   C   67   F to  185   F     Timing Holdover    Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator  TCXO    Feature Standard   Drift rate 18 milliseconds day typical after having been locked to a stable reference for at least  30 minutes   Assumes less than 5  C temperature change over this time period     Oscillator A ging T ypical aging for the TCXO is  lt 1E 06 month     Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator  OCXO    Feature Option   Drift Rate 1 millisecond day typical after having been locked to a stable reference for at least 1  hour   Assumes less than 5  C temperature change over this time period     Oscillator A ging T ypical aging for the OCXO is  lt 1E 07 month     Rubidium Oscillator   Feature Option   Drift Rate 3 microseconds day typical for a Model S350 and 6 microseconds day typical for a  Model S300 after having been locked to a stable reference for at least 1 hour   Assumes less  than 5  C temperature change over this time period     Oscillator Aging Typical aging for the rubidium oscillator 
208. or 1 day  logging the data using a terminal emulator like Hyperterminal     gpsstrength pause 1000 repeat 100000    Press enter to terminate the script  Now plot the first field in each line  total satellites tracked   and find the largest contiguous section of all zeros  Count the number of zeroes in a row   divide by 3600  sec hr  and multiply by the drift rate of your oscillator  ms hr      For example  if your max number of contiguous  zero  data points is 10 800 this is equivalent  to an outage of 10 800 3600 or 3 hours  If your SyncServer has a TCXO oscillator  the time  error would be 0 875ms hr   3 hrs or 2 625 milliseconds  If your SyncServer has a Rubidium  oscillator  the time error would be 0 001ms hr   3 hrs or 0 003 milliseconds     Note  To minimize the accumulated time error during outages  Symmetricom recommends  purchasing SyncServer with the Rubidium oscillator option  A SyncServer equipped with a  Rubidium oscillator can maintain time to better than one millisecond accuracy to UTC with  GPS satellite outages of one month  Generally  for outages longer than several hours  the  GPS receiver needs to track a satellite contiguously for several hours to acquire time and  remove the accumulated time error     Setting the Time Manually    The SyncServer has features for setting the time manually  These can be used for a variety  of reasons  such as     a Distributing approximate UTC time   a Intentionally distributing non UTC time     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 167
209. or NTP messages  in seconds to the power of two  The maximum poll interval defaults  to 10  1 024 s   but can be increased to an upper limit of 17  36 4 h   The minimum poll inter   val defaults to 6  64 s   but can be decreased to a lower limit of 4  16 s      MD5 Key  Use this field to authenticate NTP messages to and from the SyncServer for this  specific association  When enabled  the NTP packet header includes authentication fields  encrypted using either the MD5 key number  1 to 16  or autokey  Prior to selecting either  option  the user must configure the NTP   MD5 Keys  NTP   Autokey  or NTP   Autokey Client  pages     Note  MD5 and Autokey cannot be used on the SyncServer concurrently  Configuring one  method erases the keys or certificates of the other     Time to Live  This option is used only with broadcast association  It specifies the time to live  on broadcast server  Consult with the network administrator to specify a correct value  If this  field is left blank  the value of TTL defaults to 127     RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   MD5 Keys    Use this page to generate or manipulate keys generated using the RSA Message Digest 5   MD5  algorithm authentication method  MD5 Keys are used 
210. or SNMPv3 traps  an optional Priv Phrase     To edit a trap recipient  select the checkbox of a specific recipient and click the EDIT button   Edit the values displayed in Add Edit Trap Recipient and click the SAVE button  Similarly   use the DELETE button to remove trap recipients from the list     NETWORK   Ping    Network Ping Test    Use this page to PING a network node from one of the SyncServer s network ports  This fea   ture can be used to test and troubleshoot network connectivity issues     To use PING     1  Select the network port from which to send the PING packets   2  For IPv   networks  select Ping 6     3  Enter the IP address of the host and click the APPLY button  Ping Output displays the results  five seconds after clicking apply     Note  The approximate command line equivalent is  ping  c 5  w 5   where   c 5  means   send five request packets to the requested destination  and   w 5  means  timeout after 5  seconds if no responses   The network port that sends the ping request also receives the  responses     NTP   Sysinfo  NTP Daemon Status    This page displays the status of the NTP daemon  Many of the fields below are based on the  NTP Packet  on page 190   Also see http   www ntp org     system peer  The IP address of the clock source  The source is selected by the NTP dae   mon that is most likely to provide the best timing information based on  stratum  distance  dis   persion and confidence interval  The system peer identified as  SYMM_TE 0   is t
211. ork administrator for more information    m The System Upgrade Alarm and its notification settings are enabled on the ADMIN    Alarms page  factory defaults   enabled       The user is reachable by one or more of the Alarm notification methods  email  Alarm  LED  SNMP  typically configured during installation      See also     WIZARDS   Backup  on page 86     Page 142 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Upgrading System Software    m SYSTEM   Upgrade  on page 64     ADMIN   Alarms  on page 72     Checking if an Upgrade is Available    a Check the System Upgrade Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms page to see if a software  upgrade is available    m Or  manually check for an upgrade by comparing the Release Version on the STATUS    General page with the Version at http   update symmetricom com upgradeS300 txt     Downloading the Upgrade    1  Unless instructed to use another URL  download the software from http   www    symmetricom com support ttm swlist aspx     2  Save the software to your workstation or to the USB flash drive     3   Optional  Back up the SyncServer configuration to your workstation or USB flash drive   Also see Creating a Backup File  on page 157      Upgrading the Software   The user can upgrade the software using any one of the three methods given below   Note  Please wait approximately 5   10 minutes while the SyncServer upgrades  shuts  down  and reboots  Avoid disconnecting or switching the power off during the upgrade proc   ess    Method 1  Using the 4  USB function on 
212. orted by the SyncServer     Web Server  HTTPD   Provides the SyncServer s web interface  If Auto Startup is deselected  and the SyncServer reboots  the web interface will not be available     To start the web server after it has been stopped  open a command line session through the  Console RS 232 port located on the front panel or  if available  through a Telnet session with  LAN1 port  Once logged in  restart the web server by typing  HTTP on      NTP  Network Time Protocol daemon  Supports all NTP functions     PTP  Precision Time Protocol daemon  Supports all PTP functions     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 81    Web Interface    SNMP  Simple Network Management Protocol daemon  Responds to SNMP requests and  sends SNMP traps     SSH  Secure Shell daemon  Provides an encrypted channel for command line sessions with  the SyncServer through the LAN 1 port     Sysplex  Sysplex timing information on the Sysplex Timer Out connector   Time  Time Protocol requests per RFC 868 over TCP    Time   UDP  Time Protocol requests per RFC 868 over UDP    Daytime  Daytime Protocol per RFC 867 over TCP    Daytime   UDP  Daytime Protocol per RFC 867 over UDP     Telnet  Telnet protocol service for remote access to the command line interface on LAN1     Current State Startup    Shows the current state of the service  To change the state  select the desired state and click  the APPLY button     On  The service is running   Off  The service is stopped   Auto  When selected  the service starts automat
213. ov service acts htm     Disable Echo Delay  ACTS measures the echo delay to calibrate for the prop   agation delay of the telephone circuit and equipment in order to achieve accu   racies of approximately 1 or 2 milliseconds  Selecting Disable Echo Delay  disables this feature for ACTS  resulting in lower accuracies     USNO  An ACTS like service provided by the US Naval Observatory in the United States   Does not provide delay compensation     JJY  NICT Dial up standard time service  Telephone JJY  in Japan  See  http   ijy nict go jp time teljjy teljjy_p1 e html   a ITU R  Selecting ITU R generates the phone number for PTB   s telephone time service in  Germany  If needed  please consult the list of other ITU R service providers below     Dial Up Time Reference Phone Number s     Selecting an item under Preconfigured Phone Numbers populates these fields  The user can    also enter phone numbers directly  Use a     period  character to insert a pause     Note  Review this list to ensure that the nearest service  or the service with the lowest  charges  is at the top of the list     Comments    The services and numbers listed below are subject to change  Please consult with your local  time keeping authority for the latest information     Note  Some ITU R services charge fees  All tolls and fees are the responsibility of the cus   tomer     ITU R services  Services that comply with the ITU R Recommendation  ITU R TF583 4   are now available from the primary timing centres of 
214. page  This opens an https session with port  443 on the SyncServer  Also see Enabling Secure Login  on page 155      Generating and downloading MD5 keys  1  Login to the SyncServer securely     2  On NTP   MD5 Keys page  click the GENERATE button  This generates a new set of MD5  keys  overwriting any previous ones     3  Use the SAVE AS    button and save ntp keys to your computer    4  Click the RESTART button  This restarts the NTP daemon  putting all of the keys into  effect    The SyncServer automatically trusts all of the NTP keys  This is equivalent to the following   command in ntp conf    trustekey 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16       Enabling MD5 for a particular NTP association   The Role ofthe association must be Server  Peer  Broadcast   1  Log into the SyncServer securely    2  Goto the NTP   Config page    3  Create or editan NTP association    4      Set MD5 Key to Key and select a key number  That key number must be a trustedkey on  the other device for authentication to work     5  Click the SAVE button    6  Click the RESTART button    After several minutes go to NTP   Assoc and confirm that Reach for this association is greater  than O  If not  authentication isn t working     Uploading the MD5 keys to a SyncServer   1  Login to the other SyncServer securely    2  Onthe NTP   MD5 Keys page  use the BROWSE button to locate the files on your computer   3  Click the UPLOAD button  This copies the keys to the SyncServer   4      Click the RESTART butto
215. page 154   RESTART Button    After changing the NTP configuration  click the RESTART button to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   Autokey Client    Use this page to manage  add or remove  Autokey keys for NTP associations where the  SyncServer is an NTP client     Note  MD5 and Autokey cannot be used on the SyncServer concurrently  Configuring one  method erases the keys or certificates of the other     Configuration of SyncServer as Autokey Client    Removal of Existing Client Relationship    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 35    Web Interface    To remove keys  select the checkbox of the key s   and click the DELETE button  Existing keys  are identified by their Scheme and Filename  Click RESTART to complete the removal process   Upon completing the removal process  the SyncServer will not be able to authenticate NTP  packets from NTP servers that use those keys     NTP Autokeys are not fully removed until the user clicks RESTART     Addition of New Client Relationship  To add keys  use the following fields as described   Select the Identity Scheme of the key       For PC and GQ identity schemes  enter the Server Password  the same password used  while generating the keys or certificates on the Autokey server  using the NTP   Autokey  page        u Forthe PC scheme  use BROWSE to locate th
216. plays a message similar to the following example     15 00 29 Apr 05  NTP Engine started   15 00 28 Apr 05  Offset  067ms  192 168 61 58  192 168 61 58        Verify that the  Offset  message contains the IP address ofthe SyncServer and not the next  server down the list of Active Servers  Otherwise  see the troubleshooting topic  NTP  Clients  on page 141      Using NTP Authentication    NTP uses authentication to prevent spoofing  intercept  and replay type attacks  The two  standard methods of NTP authentication are available on the SyncServer     a MD5 keys  a form of symmetric key cryptography   a Autokey  a form of public key cryptography     Only one method can be used at a time  MD5 keys and Autokey cannot be used concurrently  on the SyncServer     Note  Log in tothe SyncServer securely  https port 443  when configuring NTP authen   tication  Also see Enabling Secure Login  on page 155      Using MD5 Keys on a SyncServer  A high level description of how to set up MD5 authentication between two NTP devices     1  Generate the MD5 keys on one device   2  Securely transfer the keys to the other device   3  Configure the relevant NTP association s  to use MD5 authentication     Mix and match the sections in this topic with those in Using MD5 Keys on a generic NTP  device  on page 152  as needed     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 151    Tasks    Recommendation  When configuring NTP authentication  log in to the SyncServer securely  by selecting the Secure checkbox on the Login 
217. ponds by simply interchanging addresses and  ports  filling in the required time information and returning the message to the client  Servers  need retain no state information between client requests  while clients are free to manage  the intervals between sending NTP messages to suit local conditions     In the symmetric modes  the client server distinction  almost  disappears  Symmetric passive  mode is intended for use by time servers operating near the root nodes  lowest stratum  of  the synchronization subnet and with a relatively large number of peers on an intermittent  basis  In this mode the identity of the peer need not be known in advance  since the asso   ciation with its state variables is created only when an NTP message arrives  Furthermore     Page 16 997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS   NTP    the state storage can be reused when the peer becomes unreachable or is operating ata  higher stratum level and thus ineligible as a synchronization source     Symmetric active mode is intended for use by time servers operating near the end nodes   highest stratum  of the synchronization subnet  Reliable time service can usually be main   tained with two peers at the next lower stratum level and one peer at the same stratum level   so the rate of ongoing polls is usually not significant  even when connectivity is lost and error  messages are being returned for every poll     leap indicator  LI    The Leap Indicator  LI  is a two bit binary number in the NTP packet header tha
218. pp into 50 Ohms  AM Ratio 3 1  10     Selectable Time Code Output Formats           RIGE  G00 CLS CF  SBS   004  OCLS CF   Roo2 0015              boa potg     A003  DCLS  SBS  B003  DCLS SBS    A004  DCLS  YR  CF  SBS  004  DCLS  YR  CF  SBS  A005  DCLS  YR  CF  005  DCLS   YR  CF    6  DCLS  YR   FA   0     B  Boo  A006  DCLS  YR  B00    A007  DCLS  YR  SBS  00  A130  10 kHz  CF  SBS  12    DCLS  YR  SBS   1 kHz  CF  SBS     Page 108         IRIG E  E001  DCLS  CF   E002  DCLS     E005  DCLS  YR  CF   E006  DCLS  YR        997 01520 02 Rev  C    Rear Panel    RIGE  matoke ATA CAS  A zama       E125 kHz YR CF   A133  10kHz  S5S  B1230 kHz  SBS   E126  1kHz  YR   A135 10 kHz  YR  CF    T36  T0KH2  YR      B126 IKH2  YR     B 1344 AM    IN LETS    IRIG G Legacy TrueTime NASA 36 XR3 2137   6005  pers  YR  CF   Legacy TrueTime AM  NASA 36 AM  xR 3  250 Ha        6145  100 kHz  YR   Legacy TrueTime NASA 36 DCIS  2137  1 kHz   CF  DCLS DCLS    IRIG Control Function Bits  In the following tables  tq 1 through tq4 are the time quality bits              For the time quality bits and the unlock bits   1  means active   For IRIG output codes A  B  or E with CF  control functions   the following CF bits are encoded   IndexBit   countname   70  bit   0    71  bit 0    72  bit  0    73 unlock  1   unit is not locked to a reference    74  bit 0    75 tq1 1   timing error estimate  gt  1us    76 tq2  1   timing error estimate  gt  10us    77 tq3  1   timing error estimate  gt  100us     78 t
219. pported                         nln  CI   Gl  H       upported                Cd  H       upported                U   U   OU   U   U   U  a  a  a  m m m          nln  ti  H          upported  COMMAND support  COMMAND support  ET supported                                                          E   H    upported             upported       a aja  GI  HI          E                                upported             u u un u             2  Cd  H    upported  UPPORTE  PPO    PO   PO  PPO   PPO   PPO  PPO  PPO   PPO   PPO                          ZA  O     un                            Z  O  H  un         Ble  olo      5  nja               tu  A  a     ja  i     yt             po   J  ti  OO  CU                                     Z  O  H  UI  C   by  EE          NDMASTER CI   T  NICAST MASTE    NICAST MASTE                     Z  O  HI  UI  c    Ble  olo     nja  C      D       ja  i         pu  H  ti                JIJ Jj JI                                                          UI  C                      un       JJ Jj U                                                 UI  C  U                            Page 40 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP   Master    NOT SUPPORTED                                                                                                                         How to Activate the PTP Option    PTP in the 300 Series SyncServer can be activated at the time of purchase or at a later date   This section describes PTP activation after the SyncServer has left 
220. q4  1   timing error estimate  gt  1ms   For IRIG output code G  the following CF bits are encoded     Index Bit    countname    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 109    Specifications    70  bit 0    71  bit 0    72  bit   0    73 unlock  1   unit is not locked to a reference   74  bit   0    75 tq1 1   timing error estimate  gt  1us    76 tq2  1   timing error estimate  gt  10us    77 tq3  1   timing error estimate  gt  100us     78 tq4  1   timing error estimate  gt  1ms     For Legacy TrueTime IRIG B  the following CF bits are encoded   Index Bit   countname   50  bit 0    51  bit   0    52  bit   0    53 unlock  1   unit is not locked to a reference   54  bit   0    55 tq1 1   timing error estimate  gt  1us    56 tq2  1   timing error estimate  gt  10us    57 tq3  1   timing error estimate  gt  100us     58 tq4  1   timing error estimate  gt  1ms     When Legacy TrueTime IRIG B input is selected  the SyncServer will not lock to the incoming  code if the unlock bit   1     GPS Receiver    Description The internal GPS Receiver is the preferred reference for the SyncServer s Hard   ware Clock  The GPS receiver must be connected to a 12 VDC capable antenna using the GPS  Ant connector     Connector GPS Ant  BNC female  12 VDC antenna power feed  detects Open and Short circuits   Frequency  1575 42 MHz  LI signal    Code Coarse Acquisition  C A  code   Tracking Up to 12 satellites  All 32 PRN s     Page 110 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Rear Panel    Position Accuracy Typically    10m w  fou
221. r     E  o  o awang       01 Leap second insertion  Last minute of the day has 61 seconds   10 2 Leap second deletion  Last minute of the day has 59 seconds     1  11 3 Alarm condition  Not synchronized       When the SyncServer or NTP daemon is started or restarted  the leap indicator is set to  11    the alarm condition  This alarm condition makes it possible for NTP clients to recognize that  an NTP server  the SyncServer  is present  but that it has yet to validate its time from its time  sources  Once the SyncServer finds a valid source of time and sets its clock  it sets the leap  indicator to an appropriate value  The NTP Leap Change Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms  page can be configured to generate an alarm and send notifications each time the leap indi   cator changes state     Version Number  VN     This is a three bit integer representing the NTP version number  currently 4     Mode    This is a three bit integer representing the mode  with values defined as follows     Description    Reserved  ymmetric active  2 ymmetric passive    4 erver  Broadcast  TP control message      7  Reservedforprivateuse    ion       Stratum    This is an eight bit integer that indicates the position of an NTP node within an NTP timing  hierarchy  It is calculated by adding 1 to the stratum of the NTP system peer     For the SyncServer  the stratum values are defined as follows      U    0    Hardware Clock when locked     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 191    Glossary    16 255 Unsynchronized 
222. r  2137      Hardware Clock    The Hardware Clock manages the Input References     a Gets the time from the highest priority reference that is available   a Applies the UTC offset if the reference is GPS   a Passes the time to the NTP daemon     The NTP daemon includes a preferred server association for the Hardware Clock that can   not be edited or removed     Also see TIMING   HW Clock  NTP   Config  on page 30   and Input References  on page  188      Input References    Input References are timing inputs with connectors on the rear panel of the SyncServer   These vary by model and include       GPS   a Timecode  IRIG In     1PPS     10MHz     11 E1  Optional       u LF Radio  Optional     Page 188 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Leap Indicator    The GPS  Timecode  and LF Radio reference inputs provide time and phase  while the  1PPS  10MHz  and T1 E1 inputs provide phase only     The modem  which provides dial up time service  is not an Input Reference  it is a server  association on the NTP daemon     Leap Indicator    The Leap Indicator  LI  is a two bit binary number in the NTP packet header that provides  the following information    a Advance warning that a leap second adjustment will be made to the UTC timescale at the  end of the current day  Leap seconds are events mandated by the world time authority   BIPM  in order to synchronize the UTC time scale with the earth s rotation    a Whether the NTP daemon is synchronized to a timing reference  The settings on the  NTP   Pr
223. r all configured GPS modes     gpsSatlist OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  128    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Displays the GPS satellite tracking information in the  format of     N X1 Y1 Z1     XN YN ZN    defined as follows     N Number of satellites  If one or more satellites  are available  Xi Yi Zi follows N     Xi Satellite vehicle number     Yi Satellite signal strength in dBW where less  than  200 dBW means no signal     Zi Zican be either T or C  T racking  means the  SyncServer receives the information from the  satellite but the information is not used in its  timing solution  C urrent  means the SyncServer  currently uses satellite information in its  timing solution    Examples    For no satellites   0    For one satellite with vehicle number 16   1 16 C  158    For six satellites   6 12 C  156 14 C  155 8 T  162 24 C  158 18 C 161 6 C  160    Page 182 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP         gps 4     gpsMode OBJECT TYPE   SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  80    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    The mode of the GPS receiver defined as follows     Receiver Mode  Survey     The receiver is surveying and averaging its position   When it has finished surveying  the receiver switches   to Position Hold mode  Survey mode and Position Hold  mode are appropriate for static applications  such as a  typical server room environment  This is the default mode  when the SyncServer starts     Receiver Mode  Dynamic     Th
224. r become unsynchronized  For this reason  Symmetricom rec   ommends using static IP addresses  only using DHCP for convenience during temporary  installations     IP Version   a IPv4  The port uses IPv4 exclusively   Static or DHCP   a IPv6  The port uses IPv6 exclusively  The user must enter a static IPv6 address     IP Address  The port s IPv4 address  e g    192 168 0 100   or IPv6 address es  with  scope  e g   fe80  2a0 6dff fe00 10      Mask  The port s IPv4 subnet mask  e g    255 255 255 0    With IPv6  the mask is the  length of the prefix defined in CIDR format  Classless Inter Domain Routing   Typically  the  IPv6 mask is 64     Gateway  The port s IPv4 or IPv6 gateway  e g    192 168 0 1    This is an optional con   figuration parameter     Management  Reserved for future use   Redundant  Bonds LAN3 to LAN  as virtual device with a single network address       Active  The Active port handles network traffic  LAN2 is  Active  by default   a Backup  The Backup port handles network traffic if the connection to the Active port fails   LAN3 is the  Backup  port by default     If the connection to LAN2 fails  LAN2 becomes backup and LAN3 becomes active  After  repairing the connection  the user can manually reconfigure LAN2 as the Active port     1  Inthe  LAN2 Configuration  window  select the  Redundant  checkbox  select  Active    and then click the APPLY button     2  On the NETWORK   Ethernet page  click the APPLY button     To release a redundant bond  deselect th
225. r configured UTC  local  or GPS time   See TIME Button  on page 89      NTP Status Screen  Network Time Protocol  NTP  daemon status     Stratum  The Stratum number of the SyncServer  Stratum 1 means it is locked to a Hardware  Clock Input Reference or to dial up time service from the Modem  Stratum 2 15 means the  SyncServer is locked to another NTP time source  Stratum 16 means that the SyncServer is  unsynchronized     REF  This field identifies the  system peer   While stratum is 16  this field shows the pro   gression of the NTP clock PLL  The field starts with a value of  INIT   Once a peer has been  selected  the clock may be stepped  in which case the reference ID field changes to  STEP    Once the PLL is locked  the stratum is updated and the reference ID provides information  about the selected peer  When the SyncServer is operating at stratum 1  the reference ID dis   plays the name of the Hardware Clock reference input  If the selected peer is another NTP  server  the reference ID displays the address of the server     NTP Packet I O  The number of NTP packets the SyncServer has replied to and initiated  The  SyncServer replies to clients that send NTP requests  The SyncServer also sends NTP  requests when the NTP daemon isn t synchronized  i e   Sync LED is RED  and when it is  configured to synchronize to an NTP association  e g   a Server type association      Page 90 997 01520 02 Rev  C    STATUS Button    Also see STATUS   NTP  on page 16      Alarm Status Sc
226. r example  one satellite with vehicle number 16    1 16 C  158   For six satellites   6 12 C  156 14  C  155 8 T  162  24 C   158 18 C 161 6 C  160    HALT  Halts the operating system  After entering the command  it prompts  Enter  Y  to con   firm   Halt the SyncServer before turning the power off  Action only command     REBOOT  Halts and reboots the operating system  After entering the command  it prompts  you   Enter    Y    to confirm  Action only command     DEFAULTS  Replaces the current configuration of the SyncServer with the factory default con   figuration  After entering the command  it prompts    Enter    Y    to confirm     The command also  halts and reboots the SyncServer  Action only command     IPV4ADDRESS  lt aaa bbb ccc ddd gt   Displays or sets the LAN 1 IPv4 address  Without input  the  command displays the current IPv4 address  With input  the command sets the new IPv4  address  Query and action command     IPV4MASK  lt aaa bbb ccc ddd gt   Displays or sets the LAN 1 IPv4 subnet mask  Without input  the  command displays the current IPv4 subnet mask  With input  the command sets the new  IPv4 subnet mask  Query and action command    IPV4GATEWAY  lt aaa bbb ccc ddd gt   Displays or sets the LAN1 IPv4 gateway  Without input  the    command displays the current IPv4 gateway  With input  the command sets the new IPv4  gateway  Query and action command     IPV4DHCP  Enables DHCP for LAN1  Action only command     IPV6AUTO  Enables the automatically generated 
227. r satellites  Available from web interface   1PPS Accuracy 50 nS RMS  150 nS Peak to UTC USNO  Time standard  UTC  Signal strength 1 sat  gt   166 dBW to acquire  and  gt   171 dBW to track   Cabling options      lt 150 ft  of Belden 9104  RG 59 type   a 300 ft  with inline amplifier      Compatible with down up converter    Also see        GPS Antenna  on page 115   u GPS Cable Configurations Options  on page 135     Chassis GroundingScrew   Description The chassis grounding screw provides a secure contact for grounding the Sync   Server to a reliable earth ground    Also see  WARNING  Grounding  on page 111     WARNING  Grounding    Symmetricom recommends that the user connect the chassis grounding screw to a reliable  earth ground     AVERTISSEMENT   Symmetricom recommande que le ch  ssis soit reli      une terre fiable     VDCPower Supply    This topic applies to the 48 VDC Operation Model only   Description  VDC Power Supply   Connector Two three position screw terminal blocks   Input Voltage Range 40 60 VDC  50 watts maximum  1 5 amps    Isolation  Ground  Input is fully floating  Either input polarity may be strapped to chassis ground  at the input terminal block     Isolation Input to output 1 000 VAC minimum  Also see  WARNING  VDC Power  on page 111     WARNING  VDC Power  For the 48 VDC model ofthe SyncServer     a Use a disconnect device  such as a switch  with the appropriate voltage current rating  when connecting a VDC Power source      Only use the unit in an 
228. ration            0 000000000 0000000000000000 0000 00aaa 00011 aara00 2011 195    Command Line    The command line is a text based user interface available on most operating systems  For  example  on Microsoft Windows  open the Start menu  select Run  and enter cmd     The SyncServer has a very limited command line interface  available from the RS 232 con   sole port located on the front panel  and also by opening a TELNET session to the LAN1 net   work port  TELNET must be enabled on the SERVICES     Consult the Command Line  Interface  on page 95  for more detail     GPS    Introduction    The Global Positioning System  GPS  is a worldwide radio navigation system formed from a  constellation of at least 24 satellites that continuously orbit the earth  Most GPS satellites  have several atomic clocks that are precisely synchronized to UTC from the U S  Naval  Observatory  USNO   Coded signals are broadcast by each of the satellites with the exact  time and position of the satellite  All GPS receivers use an antenna to receive these signals   Using a GPS receiver optimized for time  rather than position   it is possible to get extremely  precise synchronization with the satellites  atomic clocks     GPS Time and Date    From Wikipedia   While most clocks are synchronized to Coordinated Universal Time   UTC   the Atomic clocks on the satellites are set to GPS time  The difference is that GPS  time is not corrected to match the rotation of the Earth  so it does not contain leap
229. ratum  on page 194      Halting the SyncServer    Symmetricom recommends shutting the operating system down before removing the power   Using the keypad display interface    1  Press the MENU button    Select 3  Sys Control    Select 2  Shutdown    Press the ENTER button     When the display shows  System Stopped   OK to Turn Power Off Now   turn the power  off     Or  using the web interface   1  Goto the SERVICES   Startup page     2  Select Halt and click the APPLY button   3  Wait approximately 30 seconds before removing power     o ANO    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 3    This page intentionally left blank    Product Overview    The SyncServer Network Time Server offers the following protocols for synchronizing equip   ment over a network     u NTP     PTP Grand Master  option    u SNTP     Time  TCP and UDP versions    a Daytime  TCP and UDP versions     Sysplex Output  dedicated port     These protocols are capable of synchronizing computers  servers  and networking equip   ment on an enterprise scale network to within milliseconds of official UTC time  This degree  of synchronization is desirable for precise time stamping of events and data correlation     Key Features    Ultra High Bandwidth NTP Time Server  m Stratum 1 Operation via GPS Satellites  m Gigabit Ethernet port plus 3 additional Independent 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ports    Internal Dial up Modem for Time Reference Redundancy    Independent Time References  GPS  Timecodes  1PPS  10MHz  u Versatile Timing Outputs  
230. rce     Timing Source Change  The Hardware Clock has switched timing references     Timing Source Change Lower Accuracy Input  The Hardware Clock has switched to a lower   priority timing source     Timing PLL Unlock Alarm  The Hardware Clock oscillator s PLL unlocked     Timing Time Quality 1e 6 Alarm  The Hardware Clock s estimated time error has exceeded 1e   6 seconds  1 microsecond      Timing Time Quality 1e 5 Alarm  The Hardware Clock s estimated time error has exceeded 1e   5 seconds  10 microseconds      Timing Time Quality 1e 4 Alarm  The Hardware Clock s estimated time error has exceeded 1e   4 seconds  100 microseconds      Timing Time Quality 1e 3 Alarm  The Hardware Clock s estimated time error has exceeded 1e   3 seconds  1 millisecond      Timing Leap Event Alarm  The leap indicator from the Hardware Clock s GPS or IRIG 1344 tim   ing references  indicates that a leap event is pending  The pending event can be a Leap Sec   ond Insertion  Leap Second Deletion  or Clear Alarm  which indicates that the alarm has  passed  See STATUS   Timing  on page 14  for more information     Note  IRIG 1344 only provides a Leap Indicator warning during the last minute of the day of  the event  In this case  while the SyncServer will propagate that information via NTP  NTP  clients may not query the SyncServer in time to be warned of the leap second adjustment     LAN  Link Alarm  A network connection is not available on LAN 1  Note that if LAN 1 is down   SNMP and Email notifi
231. re synchronizing NTP associations are available  the NTP daemon syn   chronizes with the best one  with a corresponding change to its stratum    If no synchronizing NTP associations are available  the NTP daemon s behavior is deter   mined by the settings on the NTP   Prefs page  See NTP   Prefs  on page 36     With the S300 and S350  the Hardware Clock synchronizes to the NTP daemon    With the S200  S250  and S250i  the Hardware Clock  flywheels  on the internal oscil   lator until an Input Reference becomes available again     TIMING   Sysplex    The Sysplex Timer port outputs serial time strings for IBM mainframe Sysplex systems  The  Sysplex Timer provides a common time reference across all the members of an IBM Sys   plex  The Sysplex Timer is a key component when systems on multiple CPCs share access  to the same data     See Sysplex Out  on page 105  for specifications and more information on the format of the  Sysplex output string     Sysplex Output Configuration    The Sysplex Out port located on the rear panel outputs the time of day once per second     Autostart     Yes  The Sysplex Out connector automatically outputs the time of day after system  startup  The user cannot stop or restart the output by entering the  C  or  R  commands     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 51    Web Interface    m No  The user starts or stops the Sysplex output by sending the following characters to the  Sysplex Out connector   a  C  or  c  to start the output   a  R or r to stop the output
232. reen  Current alarm status     Current  The total number of active alarms  Use the left right arrows for search through the  list of alarms     Major  List of current major alarms  Minor  List of current minor alarms  Also see ADMIN   Alarms  on page 72      LAN Status Screens   Multiple screens  one for each network port    State  Shows    Up    if the port is enabled and    Down    if the port is disabled   IPv4 Addr  Shows the address of the port    SM  Shows the subnet mask  IPv4  or scope  IPv6     GW  Gateway address    IPv6 Addr  The IPv6 Link local address for this port    Also see NETWORK   Ethernet  on page 20      Hardware Clock Status Screen  Hardware Clock and Input Reference status     Source   2 fields  The first field is the name of the current reference  The second field indi   cates  Locked  when the Hardware Clock is synchronized to that reference     HH MM SS HW  The UTC or GPS time from the Hardware Clock  depending on the   Ignore     setting on the TIMING   HW Clock page     GPS In  Indicates  Locked  if the GPS receiver is a valid source of time    1PPS In  Indicates  Locked  if 1PPS In is a valid source of phase    Timecode In  Indicates  Locked  if IRIG In connector has a valid source of time   10MHz In  Indicates  Locked  if 10MHZ In is a valid source of frequency    Also see TIMING   HW Clock  on page 48      GPS Receiver Status Screen   GPS receiver status    Status  Indicates  Locked  when the receiver has a valid timing solution   Satellites  Th
233. restricted area       u The screw torque on the Power Terminal Block is 4 5 to 5 3 inch pounds    a The unit chassis must be grounded for proper safety     AVERTISSEMENT      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 111    Specifications    Sur le 48 VDC mod  le du SyncServer   a Utilisez un dispositif de d  branchement  tel qu un commutateur  avec le classement de  tension courant appropri   en connectant une source de pouvoir de DC   a Employez seulement l unit   dans un secteur avec l acc  s limit     a Le couple de vis sur le TB de puissance est livres de 4 5    5 3 pouces   a Le ch  ssis d unit   doit   tre fondu pour la s  ret   appropri  e    VAC Power Supply    Description Universal type VAC Power supply  Connector IEC 320   Input Voltage Range 90 264 VAC   Input Frequency Range 47 63 Hz    Initial Power On    Max  Power     With Rubidium Osc 45 watts 35 watts  Without Rubidium Osc 25 watts 21 watts    Also see CAUTION  VAC Power  on page 112        CAUTION  VAC Power    u The VAC Power Supply specification reflects the overall Power Supply ratings  For UL  and CE compliance the Power Supply must only be operated at 100   240 VAC  50 60  Hz     a The SyncServer should only be plugged into a grounded receptacle   ATTENTION     a Les sp  cifications d approvisionnement de courant alternatif ci dessus refl  tent les esti   mations globales d alimentation d   nergie  Pour la conformit   d UL et de CE l al   imentation d   nergie doit   tre seulement op  r  e a 100   240 VCA  50 60 hertz 
234. rip path delay by two to get the one way path delay  ACTS then advances the  OTM by the one way path delay and the resulting time code can be synchronized within a  few milliseconds of UTC NIST      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 149    Tasks    Telephone JJY in Japan offers automatic delay compensation similar to that of ACTS     The time services run by USNO in the US and the PTB in Germany do not offer delay com   pensation     Working with Generic NTP Devices    This topic provides a starting point for users to work with NTP on a UNIX or Linux operating  system  For more information  consult the manufacturer s documentation or search online  for information about a particular device or operating system     Log in as the root user   The NTP configuration file  ntp conf  is usually located at  etc ntp conf     If needed  use the find command to locate a file under the current directory  The find com   mand syntax is  find  name  lt filename gt    For example  change directories by entering     cd     Then search for ntp conf by entering    find  name ntp conf   Edit ntp conf  For example  enter    joe  etc ntp conf   Add associations to the ntp conf file as described in specific NTP topics   Save the changes to ntp conf     Restart the NTP daemon  The commands vary from system to system  but here are some  examples     ntpd  g  N   ntpd  g    etc init d ntpd restart  service ntpd restart   etc rc d init d ntpd restart    Otherwise  restart NTP by rebooting the operating system  T
235. rmittentiflicker  Poor position  weak signal    Solid On  No signal    Positioning the Antenna    The LFR contains a ferrite rod antenna that isn t visible from the outside  The orientation of  the ferrite rod antenna has a significant effect on performance  The ferrite rod is in the opti   mal position when        u The black arrow on the top of the LFR is pointing toward the LF radio transmitter   m The ferrite rod is horizontal     Page 162 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using LF Radio    Y LF Transmitter        LFR Module    Finding the Direction of the LF Radio Transmitter  Keeping the ferrite rod horizontal     1  Hold the LFR near its intended location     2  Find the weakest reception by rotating the LFR Antenna so the Signal Quality LED  shows  Solid On  or  Intermittent      3  Rotate the LFR Antenna 90 degrees to the  best position   The signal quality LED should  show  Once per second on off     4  Temporarily mount the LFR antenna in this location  preserving the orientation of the fer   rite rod     Note  LF radio signals have the greatest range at night  peaking around 1 AM local time  It  may be necessary to perform this procedure after dark     Configuringthe SyncServer  1  On the REFERENCES   LF Radio page  select the appropriate radio time service and click  APPLY     2  Onthe TIMING   HW Clock page  enable the LFR reference  shown as DCF77  JJY  or  WWVB  and click APPLY     3  Monitor the Signal Quality on the REFERENCES   LF Radio page for several days  At a min
236. rt filling up  When the number starts to grow from 0   this is an  indication that the SyncServer is processing packets  the network is busy  and  requests are sitting in the queue  If the queue percentage reaches 100   the  queue will be flushed     An example of the PTP Performance Logged in 15 Minute Intervals    Delay Requests Sync Messages Resets                      Interval Start Time Count Queue Count Queue Daemon Queues  09 05 2010 07 15 1372 03 899 03 0 0  09 05 2010 07 30 1481 03 893 03 0 0  09 05 2010 07 45 1367 03 897 03 0 0  09 05 2010 08 00 1355 03 896 03 0 0  09 05 2010 08 15 1355 03 897 03 0 0  09 05 2010 08 30 1373 03 896 03 0 0                   Click the RESET button to reset the performance log     Page 46 997 01520 02 Rev  C    PTP   Save Restore    Charting PTP Performance    The PTP Performance chart is handy to show how your network traffic is occurring dynam   ically  For example  the cause of a spike at traffic occurring at a certain time each day could  be investigated  improving the network performance     To Create a Chart    Click the CHART button to view a chart of the PTP packet performance  After several sec   onds  a chart will appear  The chart will show the selected data set  Delay data sets have a  red chart line  and sync data sets have a black or blue chart line  Both data sets are drawn  against a timeline of the 15 minute intervals     To view different data sets  click the Data Set button  Available selections are     e E2E Packets  
237. s Input References  However  a synchronizing NTP asso   ciation can override the FreeRun setting    a Ifthe user intends to use UTC time  Symmetricom recommends keeping the cur   rent NTP configuration     a Ifthe user intends to distribute non UTC time  Symmetricom recommends chang   ing the current NTP configuration by deleting all synchronizing NTP associations   See Setting the Time Manually  on page 167  and Distributing Non UTC  Time  on page 170      Symmetricom recommends using the Auto setting   Also see Hardware Clock  on page 188      IMPORTANT  If the user is preparing to switch from Free Run to Auto and the time is more  than 1000 seconds off UTC time  manually set it within 1000 seconds of UTC time before  switching to Auto     Note  On the Sysplex Timer output  if the user sets Forced Timing Source to Free Run  the  Sysplex Flywheel Quality Character in effect at that moment remains in effect thereafter   Also see TIMING   Sysplex  on page 51      Ignore UTC Corrections from GPS Reference    When the Hardware Clock is locked to the GPS receiver  the GPS receiver passes GPS  time and a GPS UTC offset to the Hardware Clock     When  gnore UTC Corrections from GPS Reference setting is     a Unselected  the Hardware Clock uses the GPS UTC offset and passes UTC time to the  NTP daemon   Recommended   Factory Default    m Selected  the Hardware Clock ignores the GPS UTC offset and passes GPS time to the  NTP daemon     To use this setting  consult Distributing GPS Ti
238. s and raises this alarm if  a software upgrade is available  Symmetricom recommends leaving this alarm enabled   Symmetricom recommends enabling Send Trap and or Send Email for this alarm on the  ADMIN   Alarms page     Note  In order to detect upgrades  the SyncServer must be correctly configured with a DNS  server and must have http access to the Internet through port 80  This feature is enabled by  default  but can be disabled on the SYSTEM   General page     System Config Change Alarm  Generates an alarm if the system configuration has been  changed  If the Auto Clear is not selected  this alarm will remain pending until cleared by the  administrator     System Health Alarm  The web interface has been unable to automatically save user con   figuration changes to the backup file  The user might need to perform a manual backup using  the WIZARDS   Backup page     System Up Down Alarm  Reserved for future use     System Authentication Alarm  The SyncServer detected a failed login attempt on the web inter   face     Timing No Source Alarm  The Hardware Clock does not have a valid timing reference     Timing GPS Source Alarm   Displayed on GPS equipped SyncServers only  The GPS time ref   erence is not providing valid timing information  This may be caused by     a An insufficient number of visible GPS satellites    a The GPS satellite signals may be blocked from reaching the antenna  or are too weak to  be detected by the receiver       u The GPS antenna cable may be disconne
239. s bes  n 62  REFERENCES   VIJEN oo st ru 63  SYSTEM   General 2 0 00 cnc ceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeee 63  SYSTEM A 64  SYSTEM   Factory Reset    cnc cnnnccnnicncs 64   Factory Default Settings    65  SYSTEM   Options    aaao aoaaa aaao o 0000000000000000 0000220000002202 69  ee o atico sa actas 69  IN EI IN 71  ADMIN EN 000     e cece c cece ec ec ee ceccececcececceceececeececeeees 72   Alarm Descriptions           00000000000000000000 0000000000000000 aoaaa 0 aAA Laaa aa aoaaa anoano annann 73   Factory Default Settings for Alarms  c cece eee cece eee ec cee cecceceeceeeee 17  ADMIN   Logs Config  ec cee ecceccececcececsececeece 78  ADMIN   GLA Sino ee nu T   ui 80  ADMIN   RADIUS  sea vene lts bash ala a a aust aa ks 80  SERVICES   Startup    naana anaana anana nononono ooo onono oooi o 2222122 81  SERVICES   HTTP    aanne aa 82  SERVICES    SOSH    ooo ici piedad se Meade kawan a na a aa 83  SERVICES   Email aaao aaa aoaaa 000000000000000 oaaao 0 aaao aaao a aoaaa aaeoa 84  OS ib naa ne naco A A eT 84  WIZARDS   1st Setup    85  WIZARDS NE AA 86  WIZARDS   SNMP o oo eceee ee ceeeeecece eee ee eees 86  WIZARDS   Backup                                                                                86  WIZARDS   Restore hautes AGANG a a ad 86  WIZARDS   Uparade 00 00 0aaaaa naaa anaa 0 000000000 aaao aaao a aoaaa oaaao aaan 87    Page 10 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Login    Login    Use the Login page to     a Login to the Sync Server s web interface   a Recover lost passwords   a View
240. serve as an autokey password  Cryp   tographically  a string of random ASCII characters would be the strongest password  This is  equivalent to the  crypto pw  lt server password gt   line in ntp conf on a generic NTP device     Client Password  When the IFF Identity Scheme is selected  enter a client password to be  used by all of the Autokey clients associated with this server  When configuring the Autokey  client  the user enters the client password on the NTP   Autokey Client page     Use the GENERATE button to create the key file and or certificate file  After the keys and or  certificates have been generated  Auto  autokey  becomes available in the MD5 Keys menu  on the NTP   Config page  Use this field to apply autokey authentication to NTP associations     Use the DELETE button to clear previous keys and certificates  This is a required step before  generating new ones   Key File Download    After using the GENERATE button  select the individual key or certificate files and click SAVE  AS to download them to a secure location     For the PC scheme  save both the server host key and certificate files to a secure location  and install them on the Autokey clients  For the IFF and GQ schemes  save the group key file  to a secure location and install it on the Autokey clients     After downloading the keys  click the RESTART button to make the key s  active on the NTP  server     Note  NTP Autokeys are not active until the user clicks RESTART   Also see  Using Autokey  on 
241. session while it is active  This command has no effect if it is  executed from a serial session     trace  Displays the current contents of the trace buffers  Most of the commands currently do  not use the trace buffer facility  It is normal that the trace buffers are empty     clear  Clears the trace buffers     stamp  Queries the time stamp of the internal operating system clock  which is set to zero  when the SyncServer is powered on  The time stamp of the internal operating system clock  is in milliseconds     history  Displays the last fifteen commands that have been executed     pause  lt milliseconds gt   Waits for user specified number of milliseconds and then executes the  next command if it is provided in the same command line following the number  For example   the    pause 5000 history    command would wait for five seconds and then execute the history  command  Input any integer number as the number of milliseconds to pause     repeat  lt count gt   This commands repeats execution user specified number of times of a com   mand specified before it  For example  the    GPSSTRENGTH repeat 5    executes  GPSSTRENGTH five times         pound sign followed by a space  Creates a comment from the space to the end of line  character  This is useful for adding a comment to a command being recorded in a logfile  For  example     GPSSTRENGTH pause 1000 repeat 1000   monitor GPS sats  lt enter gt      Also   the command could be used to simply have the system ignore the remai
242. siness  interruption costs  loss of data or software restoration  or damages relating to Buyer s pro   curement of substitute products or services  Except for liability for personal injury or property  damage arising from Symmetricom   s negligence or willful misconduct  in no event will Sym   metricom s total cumulative liability in connection with any order hereunder or Sym   metricom s Goods  from all causes of action of any kind  including tort  contract  negligence   strict liability and breach of warranty  exceed the total amount paid by Buyer hereunder   SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW CERTAIN LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS  OF LIABILITY  SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO  ALL BUYERS     Contact Information    Symmetricom  Inc   Government Business Unit  3750 Westwind Blvd   Santa Rosa  CA 95403  Main   1  707  528 1230    For Sales  Technical Support  and Return Materials Authorization  please See    Symmetricom Customer Assistance  on page v    Symmetricom Customer Assistance  To find the Symmetricom representative closest to your location  please visit Symmetricom  Worldwide Sales http   www symmetricom com  online   Toreach a Symmetricom Customer Assistance Center  call one of the following numbers   a Worldwide Main Number  1 408 428 7907      US Toll free Number  1 888 367 7966  1 888 FOR SYMM   m Europe  Middle East  amp  Africa  49 700 32886435    This page intentionally left blank    Table of Contents    AA AA iii   COP NBA Sama aseo al ALIGN 
243. ss  For example        5   IPV4GATEWAY  192 168 47 1  6   IPV4GATEWAY 192 168 46 1       Page 98 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Specifications    In this section    Front Pamela io ee 100  USB i  5 aaao aaa0a00 00000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000 a aaeoa 100  Console RS 232 POT   100  Status EDS aaa aag Eea 101  Keypadi Display  101   Rear Panel    occ c ccc cece cece ccc eecceceececececeeecceeeceesettceeetcceettsseetees 102  Radio  LF Radio Module     102  DJEM oaa aaaa aoaaa anaana aoaaa ahaa Laaa AALL L LLALL P LDDP DDD L LLALA P DLLD LALA DLL naana 102  Power and Alarm Relays  Ja 102  INSHVORK  POFTS      22 LUNG AD dota 103  Ea a ka Nara A DEDE BONNET At ALE AT rete 104  SA ed kaa Un Aa a nA BOB es 105  TONA In  eee kaaa 106  LLa AOT iii eine 106  BES TR a ee 106  IPPS OU td ma KAPA AA GE a o lt eee nia AO 107  IRIG In  Timecode In     107  IRIG Out  Timecode Out     0000000000000 0aaa aoo oaoa 1a aooaa 1aani 108  GPS Rate ver  110  Chassis Grounding STrENV  2 2c cece eee ce eee ec cee ceececeecceeceececcesceeeeees 111  VDC Power Supply       00000000000000a00000a 000000000000 00da aaeoa aoaaa aooaa aiaa r aan 111  VAC Power SUPRITY   Le 112  Power Switch    kakasa 112   Physical AA Aa a Gn costado Used de 112   Environmental    113   Shock and Vibration    113   Accuracy  amp  Stability   Timing Performance                                           114   GPS Antenna aoaaa aoaaa anana aoaaa a aaao DDAA AALL LLALA AAEL DDL LAAD DDD L LALA L 2na 115   Timing Holdovenr 11
244. st Setup    Symmetricom strongly recommends using the 1st Setup to perform the initial configuration of  the SyncServer  which includes   m Setting a new password   a Configuring Password Recovery  optional    u Configuring the IP address  hostname  and DNS for LAN 1  erases network settings for  all other network ports     Setting the local time zone  optional      Also see   a For STEP 1  Password Setup and STEP 1A  Password Recovery  also see ADMIN    Users  on page 71    u For STEP 2  LAN  IP Address  Hostname and DNS Servers  also see NETWORK    Ethernet  on page 20      u For STEP 2A  Local Time Zone  also see TIMING   Time Zone  on page 48      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 85    Web Interface    WIZARDS   NTP   Symmetricom recommends using this wizard to perform an initial NTP configuration of up to  5 server associations    To modify an existing NTP configuration  use the NTP   Config page instead    Note  This Wizard deletes all NTP associations that are not server associations    Also see  NTP   Config  on page 30  and NTP   MD5 Keys  on page 33      WIZARDS   SNMP    Use the SNMP wizard to add or change the following SNMP v1 v2c settings     m SetSysLocation  SysContact and SysName  a Setthe Read and Write Community Strings    Add up to four v1 v2c Trap Destinations    Advanced SNMP configuration  e g   SNMP v3  is performed on the NETWORK   SNMP and  NETWORK   Traps pages  Upon completing the Wizard  the new SNMP settings replace the  previous ones and the SNMP daemon
245. stores the fac    tory configuration    After 100 seconds  turn the power switch off and disconnect the power cable    Remove the jumper from the JP4 jumper pins    Secure the top cover to the SyncServer using the screws    Reconnect the power cable and turn the SyncServer s power on  The default factory con    figuration has been restored           ND    WARNING  Removing Power  Prior to removing the top cover  disconnect all power connections     AVERTISSEMENT   Avant d enlever le couvercle  d  branchez le courant   lectrique      Removing the Top Cover  After halting the SyncServer as described in Halting the SyncServer  on page 3      1  If needed  remove the SyncServer from the equipment rack   2  Disconnect the power from the SyncServer   3  Remove the top cover  lid    a Remove the six retaining screws from the top cover   a Lift the rear edge of the top cover from the chassis   m SLOWLY and firmly separate the top cover from the adhesive heatsink pad     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 159    Tasks    Replacing the Battery  Toreplace the battery     1  Remove the SyncServer s top cover  Also see Removing the Top Cover  on page  159     2  Locate the circular silver colored disc shaped lithium battery  located on the front right  corner of the motherboard    3  Please do not lift or bend the metal clip  Doing so may damage or break the battery holder    requiring repair    Locate the sloping black plastic latch  opposite from the metal clip    Depress the latch and slide the 
246. storing the Factory Default Configuration  on page  158      See also  Properties of User Names and Passwords  on page 11     Halting the SyncServer    Symmetricom recommends shutting the operating system down before removing the power   Using the keypad display interface     1  Press the MENU button    2  Select 3  Sys Control    3  Select 2  Shutdown    4  Press the ENTER button    5  When the display shows  System Stopped   OK to Turn Power Off Now   turn the power  off    Or  using the web interface     1  Goto the SERVICES   Startup page   2  Select Halt and click the APPLY button   3  Wait approximately 30 seconds before removing power     CAUTION  Stoppingthe SyncServer    Avoid removing power while the SyncServer is operating  Stop the operating system before  removing power     ATTENTION     vitez de couper le courant   lectrique pendant que le SyncServer fonctionne   Veuillez fermer le syst  me d exploitation avant d enlever le courant     Backing Up Restoring Configurations    SyncServer s configuration settings can be saved to a  backup  file  which is useful in the fol   lowing scenarios        u The user is testing multiple SyncServer configurations  The user saves the  original  con   figuration before testing  and then saves some of the more promising test configurations   When the testing is complete  the user selects the best configuration and applies it to the  SyncServer      The user needs to configure several SyncServers  The user configures a single Syn
247. t provides  the following information       Advance warning that a leap second adjustment will be made to the UTC timescale at the  end of the current day  Leap seconds are events mandated by the world time authority   BIPM  in order to synchronize the UTC time scale with the earth s rotation    a Whether the NTP daemon is synchronized to a timing reference  The settings on the  NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect LI behavior     op poe oS       Leap on insertion  Last minute of the day has 61 seconds   Leap second deletion  Last minute of the day has 59 seconds     Alarm condition  Not synchronized        When the SyncServer or NTP daemon is started or restarted  the leap indicator is set to  11    the alarm condition  This alarm condition makes it possible for NTP clients to recognize that  an NTP server  the SyncServer  is present  but that it has yet to validate its time from its time  sources  Once the SyncServer finds a valid source of time and sets its clock  it sets the leap  indicator to an appropriate value  The NTP Leap Change Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms    Page 26 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP   Sysinfo    page can be configured to generate an alarm and send notifications each time the leap indi   cator changes state     stratum     This is an eight bit integer that indicates the position of an NTP node within an NTP timing  hierarchy  It is calculated by adding 1 to the stratum of the NTP system peer     For the SyncServer  the stratum values are defined as follows
248. t provides  the following information     a Advance warning that a leap second adjustment will be made to the UTC timescale at the  end of the current day  Leap seconds are events mandated by the world time authority   BIPM  in order to synchronize the UTC time scale with the earth s rotation     a Whether the NTP daemon is synchronized to a timing reference  The settings on the  NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect LI behavior     SS     INowaming esses warning        Leap second insertion  Last minute of the day has 61 seconds   Leap second deletion  Last minute of the day has 59 seconds     Alarm condition  Not synchronized        When the SyncServer or NTP daemon is started or restarted  the leap indicator is set to  11    the alarm condition  This alarm condition makes it possible for NTP clients to recognize that  an NTP server  the SyncServer  is present  but that it has yet to validate its time from its time  sources  Once the SyncServer finds a valid source of time and sets its clock  it sets the leap  indicator to an appropriate value  The NTP Leap Change Alarm on the ADMIN   Alarms  page can be configured to generate an alarm and send notifications each time the leap indi   cator changes state     stratum     This is an eight bit integer that indicates the position of an NTP node within an NTP timing  hierarchy  It is calculated by adding 1 to the stratum of the NTP system peer     For the SyncServer  the stratum values are defined as follows     o  Hardware Clock 
249. th Generic NTP Devices  on page 150     Using MD5 Keys on a SyncServer  on page 151      u Using NTP Authentication  on page 151     ConfiguringNTP Clients  The user typically configures an NTP clients to synchronize with the SyncServer     If available  consult the manufacturer s documentation for instructions on how to do this     Page 148 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Using NTP    For a generic NTP device  this can be accomplished by adding one or more server asso   ciations to the ntp conf file  For example   server 192 168 61 50 NTP server 1    server 192 168 61 54 NTP server 2  server 192 168 61 58 NTP server 3    Save the changes and restart the device     See Working with Generic NTP Devices  on page 150      Using the Modem for Diakup Time Service    The modem provides dial up time service over ordinary telephone lines  POTS   It functions  as astratum 1 NTP server association  not as a Input Reference to the Hardware Clock  The  SyncServer typically uses the modem as a backup NTP reference if no other NTP ref   erences are available  no Input References  or reachable NTP servers and peers      To configure the modem for dial up time service     1  Connect Modem to a standard telephone line  POTS  using a RJ 11 telephone cable    2  On the REFERENCES   Modem page  select one of the services under Preconfigured Phone  Numbers  This populates the Dial Up Time Reference Phone Number s  field s  with estab   lished phone numbers for that service    3   Optional  Manually enter 
250. the keypad display interface    Insert the USB flash drive in either USB port on the front panel    Press the MENU button    Select 4  USB    Select 3  Upgrade Software    Select 1  Yes    Method 2  Using the WIZARDS   Upgrade page    1  Click the BROWSE button  STEP 1  Transfer Upgrade File to SyncServer     2  Inthe Choose file window  locate and double click the upgrade file    3  Click the NEXT button  STEP 1  Transfer Upgrade File to SyncServer     4  Click the FINISH button   STEP 2  Perform Upgrade     Method 3  Using the SYSTEM   Upgrade page    1  On the SYSTEM   Upgrade page  click the BROWSE button    2  Inthe Choose file window  locate and double click the upgrade file    3  On the SYSTEM   Upgrade page  click the UPLOAD button    The SyncServer reports  Downloading Upgrade File     4  Select the upgrade file in the Current Files window and click the INSTALL button     OS Qn eS     Optional  After the upgrade     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 143    Tasks    When the SyncServer is finished rebooting  the browser shows the login page  while the  Front Panel Display shows the model  time and date     Login to the web interface and check the Release Version on the STATUS   General page  to ensure that it matches the desired version  a Check the overall configuration to verify that the settings are still correct     Webinterface    You can t reach the web interface   a Check that LAN 1 is physically connected to the network   u Ping the IP Address of LAN 1   a Check that t
251. the local  SyncServer Hardware Clock  Also see Hardware Clock  on page 188      system peer mode  The relationship of the SyncServer to a system peer  usually a  client    Depending the configuration  the mode can be       Client  A host operating in this mode sends periodic messages regardless of the reach   ability state or stratum of its peer  By operating in this mode the host  usually a LAN work   station  announces its willingness to be synchronized by  but not to synchronize the peer    u Symmetric Active  A host operating in this mode sends periodic messages regardless  of the reachability state or stratum of its peer  By operating in this mode the host  announces its willingness to synchronize and be synchronized by the peer    u Symmetric Passive  This type of association is ordinarily created upon arrival of a mes   sage from a peer operating in the symmetric active mode and persists only as long as the  peer is reachable and operating at a stratum level less than or equal to the host  other   wise  the association is dissolved  However  the association will always persist until at  least one message has been sent in reply  By operating in this mode the host announces  its willingness to synchronize and be synchronized by the peer     A host operating in client mode  a workstation  for example  occasionally sends an NTP mes   sage to a host operating in server mode  the SyncServer   perhaps right after rebooting and  at periodic intervals thereafter  The server res
252. the network ports     Also see MENU Button  on page 92      Page 138 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Installation Guide    CAUTION  DHCP Not Available    If the user selects DHCP  the SyncServer tries to reach a DHCP server for approximately 90  seconds before stopping  Please do not disconnect the power during this time     ATTENTION  Si l utilisateur choisit DHCP  le SyncServer essaye d atteindre un serveur de  DHCP pendant approximativement 90 secondes avant de s arr  ter  Veuillez ne pas enlever  le courrant pendant ce temps     Logging in to the Web Interface    1  Get the LAN1 IP address by pressing the STATUS button repeatedly until the LAN1  STATUS screen is visible on the display    2  Using Internet Explorer  enter the IP address as a URL  This displays the Login page    3  Atthe SyncServer Login page  log in  The username is admin and password is sym   metricom     Note  When entering the IP address as a URL  leave off any leading zeroes in the IP  address  For example  instead of 192 168 047 025  enter 192 168 47 25     Using the 1st Setup Wizard  Select the WIZARDS button and complete the 1st Setup wizard     1  Configure the SyncServer using WIZARDS   1st Setup  Select the following options   a  Configure Password Recovery     Ask the IT department for the IP address of the  SMTP server         u  Send test mail when finished      u  Set Local Time Zone     Note  Reconfiguring LAN 1 in the 1st Setup wizard erases the previous network settings for all  Ethernet ports     
253. the phone number of a compatible dial up service under Dial Up  Time Reference Phone Number s     4   Optional  Use the Modem Pre Test and the TEST MODEM button to verify any particular  number is reachable  A small status message to the right of the CANCEL button indicates  whether the call was successful    5  Click the APPLY button  This creates an NTP server association for the modem    6  On the NTP   Sysinfo page click the RESTART button at the bottom of the page     The user can edit and delete the modem association on the NTP   Config page  if needed     The timing accuracy of the modem is a function of the Minimum Poll Interval and Maximum  Poll Interval settings on the NTP   Config page  A smaller maxpoll causes the modem to call  the time service more frequently  yielding better synchronization     Note  The jitter on a voice over IP  VoIP  digital line may be too high  seriously degrading per   formance     Delay Compensation    For NIST Automated Computer Time Service  ACTS   the typical maximum time offset is 50  milliseconds to UTC  NIST   The typical time offset is  lt  20 milliseconds to UTC  NIST      When the SyncServer dials ACTS  the on time mark  OTM  is delayed as it travels from  NIST back to the SyncServer  Software in the SyncServer returns the OTM to ACTS after it  is received  Each time the OTM is returned  ACTS measures the amount of time it took for  the OTM to go from ACTS to the SyncServer and back to ACTS  Software at ACTS divides  the round t
254. the table below to calculate the Cable Delay by selecting the signal prop   agation rate for the type of cable and multiplying it by the length of the cable     Rate per foot   Rate per meter    RG 58 1 4 nS foot 4 59 nS meter  RG 59 1 24 nS foot 4 06 nS meter    For example  a 50 foot length of RG 59 cable x 1 24 nS foot   62 nS of Cable Delay        Page 58 997 01520 02 Rev  C    REFERENCES   Modem    Or  using metric units  a 15 24 meter length of RG 59 cable x 4 06 nS meter   62 nS of  Cable Delay     Output Type  Set the time scale used for the Timecode Output       UTC  Coordinated Universal Time  This is the factory default setting     Local  The local time  as configured on the TIMING   Time Zone page     Note  The timecode output can also be affected by the Ignore UTC Corrections from GPS  Reference setting on the TIMING   HW Clock page  Also see TIMING   HW Clock  on page  48      References    Please consult the Range Commander s Council document 200 04   IRIG Serial Time Code  Formats  TTG  on the product information CD and at https   wsmrc2vger wsmr army mil    rcc manuals 200 04 TT 45 pdf for definitions of the following timecodes       IRIGA    IRIGB      RIGE    IRIGG    NASA 36    XR3 2137    Timecode glossary       AM  Amplitude Modulated   m B 1344  Standard IRIG B with information encoded in the control bits per the IEEE 1344  standard  These include year  daylight saving time  Leap Indicator  time quality  and par   ity information      BCD  Binary Coded 
255. ther analysis     REFERENCES   GPS  GPSPosition and Operating Mode    This page can be used to view or set the GPS receiver s Position and Mode  as well as the  GPS Antenna Cable Delay     Status  Indicates whether the GPS receiver is a valid reference  locked  or not  unlocked      Current Position  The GPS antenna position in Latitude and Longitude by degrees  minutes   and seconds  and the cardinal points of the compass followed by the altitude in Meters   These values can be permanently set when the GPS Mode is set to Position Hold     Mode     m Survey  In this mode  the receiver surveys and averages its position before switching to  Position Hold mode  Use this setting for stationary applications  such as server rooms   This is the default setting      Dynamic  In this mode  the receiver continuously updates its position  Use this setting if  the position of the SyncServer could change occasionally or continuously  such as  vehicles  aircraft  and ships  This setting provides lower timing precision and accuracy  than the Survey and Position Hold modes      Position Hold  In this mode  the receiver calculates the time based on a fixed position that  has been provided by Survey Mode or entered by the user  Use this setting if GPS vis   ibility is poor and the receiver has difficulty establishing its position using Survey mode  after one day  The accuracy of the user entered position affects the accuracy of the tim   ing solution from the GPS reference  Also see Operating 
256. tion  U36   This non volatile part is used at power on to initialize registers in the  Intel Gigabit Ethernet Controller  This part is not reprogrammed in normal operation  This  part is a DIP that is mounted in an 8 pin socket    M93C46 1Kb Serial Microwire EEPROM for system configuration  U40   controlled by  PCI9030  This non volatile part is used to store unit specific data  This part is a DIP that is  mounted in an 8 pin socket     MC9S12DG256  U2      U2  256KB Flash program memory  This Flash memory is used for microprocessor pro   gram storage  This part is not reprogrammed in normal operation  The content in this  device is non volatile and there is no procedure to clear this memory  This part is sol   dered to the PCB     U2  12KB RAM  This RAM is embedded in U2 and is used as operating memory  The  content in this device is volatile and is lost when the SyncServer is powered down  This  part is soldered to the PCB     U2  4KB EEPROM  This EEPROM is embedded in U2 and is used to store non volatile  configuration data  This part is soldered to the PCB     Reliability    MTBF  gt 50 000 hours  5 7 years  for all supported display intensity settings  Calculated per Tel   cordia  Bellcore  SR332  Issue 1     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 119    Specifications    Maintainability    This unit contains no user serviceable parts  Please return to Symmetricom for servicing   The SyncServer functions without user adjustments throughout its life span   Line Replaceable Units  LRUS 
257. to authenticate  not encrypt   NTP messages sent or received by the SyncServer  using a cryptochecksum     Also see Using MD5 Keys on a SyncServer  on page 151     Note  MD5 and Autokey cannot be used on the SyncServer concurrently  Configuring one  method erases the keys or certificates of the other    NTP MD5 Security Keys   Use this page to manage MD5 keys as follows       View and copy the current keys   m Upload a file containing keys from a local PC drive to the SyncServer   a Download the SyncServer s current key file to a local PC drive     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 33    Web Interface    Generate  This button generates new random MD5 keys  immediately replacing any previous  MD5 keys and erasing Autokey certificates and keys     Current Keys  This window displays the current list of keys     The first line gives the SyncServer s hostname and the NTP time stamp of when the keys  were created  The second line shows the local time and date the keys were generated     Each row of key information provides the following information     a The key number  1 through 16     The key type   MD5     a The key  an ASCII string containing only displayable characters  As an example  the ran   dom key generator may produce   jdh u r x y upH         comment that identifies the key type  For example     MD5 key     Upload Keys  Use this text field  with the BROWSE button  to enter the file path of the keys file   Then click the UPLOAD button to load the keys to the SyncServer     Downlo
258. to non UTC NTP     Generally  the user should        u Be aware that using non UTC time  or switching between time scales  can have a  serious impact upon systems    a Perform extensive testing  and take extra measures to protect data and systems  before  implementing non UTC time    a Distribute non UTC NTP only on private or closed networks    a Avoid distributing non UTC NTP on open or public networks  or to systems that expect  UTC time    a Exercise good security practices to prevent this capability from being misused       Avoid broadcasting and multicasting non UTC NTP     Page 170 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    a Use authentication to exclude UTC based NTP clients     Distributing GPS Time  See Distributing GPS Time  on page 169      Inserting non UTC Timecode  1  Connect the non UTC Timecode signal to the IRIG In connector     2  On the TIMING   HW Clock page  enable Timecode  disable all of the other references  and  click the APPLY button     3  Onthe NTP   Config page  delete UTC based NTP associations that have the following  roles  server  peer  broadcastclient  and multicastclient     4  Click the RESTART button     5  When the NTP daemon finishes restarting  the SyncServer will be distributing non UTC  time     Manually Setting the Time to non UTC Time    See the Setting the Time Manually  on page 167  topic  While reading the text  substitute   UTC time  with  non UTC time      Synchronizing to non UTC NTP    1  Onthe TIMING   HW Clock page  disab
259. to put the new configuration  into effect  While the NTP daemon restarts  its services are temporarily unavailable  and it  generates the following alarm events  NTP Stratum Change  NTP System Peer Change   NTP Leap Change     NTP   Assoc    Use this page to view the status of NTP associations listed on the NTP   Config page   Also see NTP Associations  on page 189  in the Glossary     NTP Associations    NTP associations with non valid IP addresses and domain names are not shown   Ifa  known good domain name does not appear on this list  there may be a problem with the  DNS server configuration on the NETWORK   Ethernet page  or with the DNS service itself      Page 28 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP   Assoc    Remote  The domain name or IP address of the remote end of the NTP association     Hard   ware Clock    is the SyncServer s Hardware Clock  In the case of a remote NTP connection   this will be the IP address of the remote end     The character in the left margin indicates the mode in which this peer entry is operating     a      asterisk  the association with which the NTP daemon is synchronizing  the system  peer on NTP   Sysinfo   marked  synchronizing     a    plus  indicates the SyncServer is symmetric active mode         minus  indicates the SyncServer is symmetric passive mode          equal  means the SyncServer is in client mode  marked  being polled       a    caret  indicates that the SyncServer is broadcasting to the remote node  marked   broadcasting to     u 
260. ttenuate as it travels down the cable  GPS receiver sensitivity is finite so if the  cable length is too long the signal will be too weak for the receiver to detect it  Consequently it  is very important to know the distance in advance between the antenna and the receiver so  that the proper cable solution can be installed     Antenna cabling solutions typically vary depending on how far the antenna is installed from  the GPS receiver  The unaided cable length limit for the SyncServer is 150 feet  45 m   Add   ing a GPS inline amplifier extends the cable length an additional 150 feet  45 m  to a total of  300 feet  Beyond 300 feet  90 m  alternative methods may be used  The following figure high   lights the cable lengths and the antenna solutions that enable them    L1 GPS Antenna PARAS     roof or window       L    150ft  300 ft  with Nf J    unaided inline amplifier    L1 GPS Antenna Down Up Converter T y  PAS  1500 ft  5    L1 GPS Antenna and Fiber Optic Link _          Log Scale  AAA II E E E Maa Ka Ka ee Di  0 ft  5500 ft     Cable lengths and  antenna solutions    In line Amplifier  In line amplifiers overcome signal attenuation by amplifying the GPS signal   allowing an additional 150 feet  45 m  of cable  to a total of 300 feet  The inline amplifier  attaches directly in line with the antenna cable near the antenna and uses the same power  as the antenna  no extra wiring is required  Mounting the amplifier inside the mounting mast  helps protect it from moisture and 
261. tting is appropriate for cable lengths up to 655 feet  AIS may be man   ually selected for output    When the SyncServer is in E1 mode  the telecom signal E1  2 048 Mb s   signal has FAS  framing and CRC 4 multiframe with HDB3 line coding enabled  The transmit load imped   ance is fixed at 75 ohms and the transmit pulse shape is set for 2 37 volts nominal  AIS  may be manually selected for output     Page 104 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Rear Panel    Sysplex Out    Summary The Sysplex Timer port outputs serial time strings for IBM mainframe Sysplex sys   tems  The Sysplex Timer provides a common time reference across all the members of an IBM  Sysplex  The Sysplex Timer is a key component when systems on multiple CPCs share access to  the same data  Also see TIMING   Sysplex  on page 51    Description Sysplex Out is a male 9 pin D connector mounted on the rear chassis that transmits  Time of Day  TOD  with carriage return on time to an attached Sysplex compatible device  Con   figured as DTE  Data Terminal Equipment   Configurable via the Web interface  Sysplex typ   ically uses a  null modem  serial cable  not supplied  for interconnection with other Sysplex  equipment   Connector male 9 pin  Sysplex Out   Data Rates 9600 bps  Parity Even  Odd  or None  Data Bits 8  Stop Bits 1  Pin Assignment      1N C     2Rx     ATX   a 4N C     5GND      6N C   a IRIS      8CTS     9N C  Format IBM 9037 Sysplex Timer  First Protocol   Level RS 232  Accuracy  lt 10 mS RMS  Phasing Carriage ret
262. twork Time Protocol  NTP  Daemon  a k a   ntpd   listens for and responds to  requests from NTP clients  It also sends NTP requests to each of the NTP Associations and  qualifies each one  It synchronizes with the best NTP association and makes that time avail   able to the    See the NTP   Config  on page 30  topics for more information     NTP Packet    The NTP packet  represented using big endian 32 bit rows  appears as follows     0 2 5 0 16 24 31  DS sema    Root Delay    Root Dispersion    Reference Identifier       Reference Tenestamp  64     Originate limestamp  64   Receive Timestamp  64   Transmit Timestamp  64     Extension Field 1  optional     Extension Field     oplional     Key Identifier    Message Digest  128     Autokey uses the optional Extension Fields 1 and 2  which are not described below   Autokey and Symmetric Key Authentication both use the Key Identifier and Message Digest  fields    Leap Indicator  LI     The Leap Indicator  LI  is a two bit binary number in the NTP packet header that provides  the following information     Page 190 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NTP Packet    a Advance warning that a leap second adjustment will be made to the UTC timescale at the  end of the current day  Leap seconds are events mandated by the world time authority   BIPM  in order to synchronize the UTC time scale with the earth s rotation      Whether the NTP daemon is synchronized to a timing reference  The settings on the  NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect LI behavio
263. uired for the user  One of the fol   lowing must be selected       Authentication  Auth   Auth Phrase is always required    Auth and Privacy  Priv   Auth and Priv Phrase are always required    NETWORK   SNMP Traps    Use this page to configure  add  or delete SNMP trap recipients  The page is divided into two  sections  The first section displays the current recipients  The second section provides a form  for adding recipients or modifying existing recipients  The first section only displays basic  information for each recipient    Trap Recipients   Destination  The IP address to which traps are to be sent    Ver  The SNMP version  v1  v2c or v3      Send as Inform   If trap is to be sent as inform     inform    is written  otherwise is blank   User Community  For SNMPv1 v2c traps  an optional community  For SNMPv3 traps  a  required SNMP v3 user on the recipient system   Using SNMP v3 requires an SNMP v3  user on the recipient systems  SNMP v3 capable agent client    Add Edit Trap Recipient   IP Address  The IP address to which traps are to be sent    The SNMP version  v1  v2c  or v3     User Community  For SNMPv1 v2c traps  an optional community  For SNMPv3 traps  a  required SNMP v3 user on the recipient system     Send as Inform  Sends an INFORM PDU  otherwise a TRAP PDU or TRAP2 PDU is sent   Auth Phrase  For SNMPv3 traps  an optional Auth Phrase     Page 24 997 01520 02 Rev  C    NETWORK   Ping    The hash algorithm used for the Auth Phrase  MD5 or SHA1   Priv Phrase  F
264. upgrade is available   1 An upgrade is available     etcUpgradeServer OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 1  1024    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Address of the server where new upgrades can be  downloaded     Hz  etc 5     etcAlarmString OBJECT TYPE  SYNTAXDisplayString  SIZE 0  1024    MAX ACCESSread only   STATUScurrent   DESCRIPTION    Defines the format for the system alarm traps  This is  only valid embedded in a trap message          etc 6     etcAlarm TRAP TYPE   ENTERPRISEsymmetricom   VARIABLE S etcAlarmString    DESCRIPTION    The trap provides notification of Hardware Clock  NTP   system  and network alarms events  The user can configure  which alarms send traps on the ADMIN   Alarms page      Page 184 997 01520 02 Rev  C    Configuring SNMP    END    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 185    This page intentionally left blank    Command Line    Glossary  Command LING 22202820 dd e NAA ee SAAD Led MANUEL ANNA NAA 187  GPS o ea a a ode EBA IA AG BANG een Or eran ee 187  Hardware Clock    188  Input References    nl  ho 221a n 22222 188  Leap Indicator  ccoo ccoo ccoo cnn n cnc nnnccnnccnnnns 189  NTP Associations  ce ccc cece cece ee cececeeeseceseesees 189  NTP Daemon                     190  NTP Packet AA A BUUIN Aa IO 190  A ae Tam UA AD na et ete Ne oe 193  PTP  Precision Time Protocol    0000000000 000000000 0000000000000000 194  Stratum  nn 194  Synchronizing NTP association    194  MT ta Na AE PAN O ape gg dae wee lo 194  Operational Configu
265. urn on time marker  Control Manual or Automatic start stop  parity setting  flywheel quality character  String  lt SO H gt DDD HH MM SSQ lt CR gt  lt LF gt     Where     a  lt SOH gt Start of Header   s DDDDay   a   Colon separator   a HHHours   a MMMinutes       SSSeconds     QTime Quality   a  lt CR gt Carriage Return  On time marker   a  lt LF gt Line Feed    997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 105    Specifications    10MHz In    Description  10MHZ In  a female BNC connector mounted on the rear chassis  accepts a 10MHz  signal from an external frequency reference into the SyncServer s Hardware Clock  For the Sync   Server to maintain lock to this signal  the stability of the 10MHz input must be better than the  pull range of the system oscillator   Connector BNC female  10MHZ In   Amplitude 1 Vpp to 8 Vpp  Frequency 10MHz  Wave Shape Sine Wave or Square Wave  Impedance  gt  50 k Ohms  Typical system oscillator pull ranges      TCXO 1E 6  1 ppm     OCXO 5E 7  0 5 ppm      Rubidium 1E 9  1 ppb     Note  If the 10MHz In signal is too noisy  the Hardware Clock may not be able to lock to it     10MHz Out    Description 10MHz Out  a female BNC connector mounted on the rear chassis  provides a  10MHz signal from the SyncServer s Hardware Clock     Connector  BNC female  10MHz Out   Amplitude  gt  3 Vpp and  lt  4 Vpp into 50 Ohms  Frequency  1OMHz   Wave Shape Sine Wave    1PPSIn    Description 1PPS In  a female BNC connector mounted on the rear chassis  accepts a once per  second pulse fr
266. user names are separate and distinct from the access control list usernames used to  log in to the SyncServer s user interfaces  SNMP user names are used by the network man   agement software     This is the list of SNMP v3 users  To delete a user  select the checkbox for a user name and  click the DELETE button  When prompted  enter the passphrase specified when the user  was created  The SNMP admin user cannot be deleted      Using SNMP v3 requires an SNMP v3 user on the recipient systems  SNMP v3 capable  agent client     User Name  Name of v3 User   Mode  Currently only rouser  read only user  mode is supported     Level  Shows the Min Priv level of the user  see Min Priv  below      997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 23    Web Interface    a auth  Authentication   a noauth  No Authentication   a priv  Auth and Privacy   a blank  default level for admin    Add v3 User  To create an SNMPv3 user  complete the form and click the SAVE button   Name  Alphanumeric user name  with no spaces or special characters     Auth Phrase  Create a unique authentication passphrase for the user  It must be at least  eight characters long     Auth Crypt  The authentication type  MD5 or SHA1  It uses the Auth Phrase as its key  when calculating the message hash     Priv Phrase  Creates a unique encryption passphrase for messages exchanged between  the network management software and the SyncServer  It must be at least eight characters  long     Min Priv  Establishes the minimum authentication level req
267. when locked     16 255 Unsynchronized  unreachable        For example  the SyncServer is     997 01520 02 Rev  C Page 17    Web Interface       stratum 1 when the Hardware Clock  stratum 0  is synchronized to an input reference  in  holdover mode  or in freerun mode    a stratum 2 through 15 when it is synchronized to a remote NTP server    a stratum 16 when it is unsynchronized  indicating that it is searching for a valid source of  timing information     The settings on the NTP   Prefs  on page 36  page affect stratum behavior     precision  This is a signed integer indicating the precision of the selected peer clock  in sec   onds to the nearest power of two  A typical value is  18 for a Hardware Clock where the  uppermost 18 bits of the time stamp fractional component have value  indicating a precision  in the microsecond range     root distance  also root delay   This is a measure of the total round trip delay to the root of  the synchronization tree  A typical value for a SyncServer operating at stratum 1 would be O  since the SyncServer is a root of the synchronization tree For other stratum levels  an appro   priate value is displayed  Depending on clock skew and dispersion  this value could be pos   itive or negative     root dispersion  This is a signed fixed point number indicating the maximum error relative  to the primary reference source at the root of the synchronization subnet  in seconds  Only  positive values greater than zero are possible     reference ID  
268. work link partner  Depending on the settings of the port s link part   ner  the requested settings may not be actually taken  Sometimes the network link between  the port and its link partner may be lost due to changing of the speed and duplex settings   Symmetricom recommends using the Auto setting    Side Effects    Applying changes to the Ethernet port configuration restarts the NTP and xinetd daemons   services   During that time     u The NTP daemon  NTP stratum  web interface are temporarily unavailable   m The Status LEDs  NTP stratum  and Alarms change states     NETWORK   SNMP    This page provides configuration of basic SNMP settings and the creation of SNMPv3 users     Basic Configuration  Establish the identity and community membership of the device     sysLocation  Identify the location of the SyncServer  e g  Server Room A  Company  Division B  etc   Used by network management consoles     sysName  Provide the SyncServer with a unique name   This is distinct and separate from   hostname  on the SYSTEM   General and STATUS   General pages   Used by network  management consoles     sysContact  The name of the individual responsible for the SyncServer  Used by network  management consoles     Read Community  The SNMP read community string  The string must be provided for  SNMP v1 v2c GETS WALKS to gain access     Write Community  The SNMP write community string     Note  At this time  the SyncServer does not support any writable SNMP variables     V3 Users    SNMP 
269. ync   Server s USB ports  Please consult Upgrading System Software  on page 142  before  upgrading the software     Note  Please avoid decompressing the     tar upgrade file prior to upgrading the SyncServer   The SyncServer will not install software from an upgrade file that has been modified or  decompressed and recompressed  If needed  please download a new software file from  Symmetricom     Upload Upgrade Package to SyncServer    BROWSE button  Choose an upgrade file that s accessible from your workstation  such as a  network drive or Desktop     UPLOAD button  Upload the upgrade file to the SyncServer     Manage Files in SyncServer  Current Files  This window displays upgrade files and an upgrade history file     Optional Parameters  This field can be used to supply optional installation parameters  if  required  This field is not required for normal operation     INSTALL button  To install the upgrade file  select the file and click the INSTALL button     VIEW button  To see the upgrade history  select the upgradehist txt file and click the VIEW but   ton     DELETE button  To delete a file  select the file and click the DELETE button  It may be nec   essary to upload a file before the upgradehist txt file can be selected and deleted     SYSTEM   Factory Reset    Use this page to reset the SyncServer to its original factory default configuration     Page 64 997 01520 02 Rev  C    SYSTEM   Factory Reset    Before resetting the factory defaults  the user may want to back
270. ywheel Quality Character     About the Flywheel Quality Character  The time quality character at the end of the Sysplex output string has three states     a The first state is  X   time is invalid  The Hardware Clock has not yet synchronized to an  Input Reference       u The second state is     space   time is valid  Hardware Clock has synchronized to an  Input Reference  or is in Holdover    a The third state is  F   the Flywheel Quality Character  The Hardware Clock has no Input  References and Holdover has expired   On the SyncServer S300 and S350  if a syn   chronizing NTP association is present  the Hardware Clock is synchronized to the NTP  daemon      The time quality character can progress through a number of states     Page 52 997 01520 02 Rev  C    TIMING   Sysplex    1  After the user starts the SyncServer  the Sysplex port starts outputting a time string  Ini   tially  the time quality character is  X   time invalid     2  When the Hardware Clock locks to an Input Reference  the time quality character  becomes    time valid     3  Ifthe Hardware Clock loses all Input References and enters Holdover  the time quality  character remains     time valid      4  If Holdover expires  the time quality character becomes the Flywheel Quality Character   determined by the user    5  Ifan Input Reference becomes available again  the Hardware Clock synchronizes with it  and the time quality character becomes       time valid  again     Usually there is a short delay between t
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
JVC RM-C1257G User's Manual  Toshiba Tecra M10-S3412  V-Stamp User`s Manual  mide la apariencia y la calidad de una superficie mapa 3d  Dell Vostro 320 Service Manual  User's Manual  Installation & operating instructions for electricians & (electrically  Exerciser 2000 Elite™ Platinum Series  Samsung MM-ZB9 User Manual  Owner`s Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file